8314055322-En-104 G 08.17 Rcse 443

Reference No.
83140 55322
Edition 08.17
PDM Reference No. 8314055322‐EN‐104
PDM Version G
RCSE 443
Remote Control and

Status Equipment
Technical Manual
Equipment Description
Operation
Maintenance
As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the

documentation supplied with each equipment prevails
All rights reserved

E 2017
Thales Deutschland GmbH
Ditzingen
- blank page -
RMMC RCSE 443
Conventional Navaids Documentation Structure
STRUCTURE OF TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

The equipment documentation comprises:
Part Technical Manual P/N

Equipment Description, Operation 83140 55322
Part Set of Circuit Diagrams P/N

Delivery List, Parts List, 83140 48440
Schematic Diagrams, Layout Drawings
Note: Description and use of the PC User Program are described in the Technical Manual ADRACS,
P/N 83140 55324.
DOCUMENT HISTORY
The following table shows the released versions and the changes in the documentation compared
to each preceding edition:
Version Remarks
Date
D 03.13 - Introduction of the new, optional OIO card P/N 84045 83301
- Failure analysis of LGM Extender 2 Units (edited)
- Safety alert messages according to ISO/IEC 82079
F 10.15 - Introduction of the new, optional LGM 28.8DL modem
- AC connector and mains cable requirements
- Explanation of symbols and labels on the device, conformity requirements
- Compactflash 4GB on ETX‐CPU board obsolete, replaced by P/N 8404584125
G 08.17 - Setting of Modem Mod IC LGM 28.8 at LOC 2400 Baudrate
- Technical Data added with housing dimensions and P/N
VALIDITY OF TECHNICAL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTS

Since the Technical Manual cannot include modifications made to circuit details or dimensions as a
result of technical advances, please remember that the technical documentation supplied with the
system is always valid in questions of details. It is possible that drawing numbers referred to in this
description are no longer contained in the enclosed set of drawings, but have been replaced by new
drawings with different numbers (in accordance with the system). Therefore, please check, and if nec
essary correct, the drawing numbers specified in the manuals on the basis of the delivery lists.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS TO THIS MANUAL

The documents referenced to this Technical Manual, mainly COTS supplier manuals, are provided
in form of PDF files. The referenced documents about safety topics provide additional general infor
mation about safe operating procedures.
However, Thales cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the safety requirements result
ing from a non‐recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non–Thales option
subsystems or spare parts. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority
to operate this equipment.
[01] Analog Modem Mod IC LGM 28.8 DL / Mugler
Ed. 08.17 Info 1

RMMC RCSE 443
GENERAL
As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the documentation supplied with each equip
ment prevails. Despite of careful editing work technical inaccuracies and printing faults cannot be excluded
in this publication. Change of text remains reserved without notification.
Thales reserves the right to make design changes, additions to improvements in its products without obligation
to install such in products previously manufactured or installed.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT AND HANDLING REPLACEMENT PARTS
Subassemblies and components which are sent to the manufacturer for repair or returns must be packed in
a way that no damage of the parts could arise. It is recommended to use the original packing, e.g. of the spare
part, or a comparable packing in corresponding performance to ensure a safe shipping of defective subassem
blies or components. For technical support and information on how to order or sent back replacement parts,
contact your equipment provider listed below.
Germany: Thales Deutschland GmbH
Thalesplatz 1
71254 Ditzingen, Germany
Tel. +49 7156 353 28151
www.thalesgroup.com/germany
info.deutschland@thalesgroup.com
Italy: Thales Italia SPA
Via E. Mattei, 1
20064 Gorgonzola (MI)
Tel. +39 02 95095–405
Fax +39 02 95095–331
www.thalesgroup.com/italy
info.it@thalesgroup.com
USA: Thales Defense & Security, Inc.
Thales Air Traffic Management U.S.
10950 El Monte Street; Suite 110
Overland Park, KS 66221–USA
Tel. + 1 913–422–2600
www.thalesdsi.com
atm_info@thalesdsi.com
LIMITATION OF USE
The use of this manual is limited to the operation and maintenance of the system stated in the title page. It shall
not be used for purposes of product manufacture. The installation drawings in the manuals, e.g. foundations
and site drawings are for information only. The as-built engineering drawings for the site are the only one to
be used. The information in the technical manuals is thought to be used by skilled workers to install the antenna
and perform the related electrical and mechanical adjustments. The leader of the installation team should be
an engineer, technician or experienced master craftsman. Special training and initiation by Thales are urgently
recommended. The fitters should be trained craftsman, for example mechanics, electricians or locksmiths.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The safety regulations laid down by the local authorities (e.g. concerning accident prevention, work safety or
operation of electronic equipment and navigation systems) must be observed at all times. The purpose of safe
ty precautions is to protect persons and property, and they must always be heeded. Station shutdown due
to repair and maintenance: The responsible authorities must be notified of any work which may require opera
tion of the system to be interrupted, in accordance with national regulations. Further information due to system
handling is contained in the correspondent sections.
COPYRIGHT
Reproduction of this manual is not permitted without written authorization of Thales.
Ed. 08.17 Info 2

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Preliminary Remarks
PRELIMINARY REMARKS
This Technical Manual describes the equipment in the following chapters:
1 General Description
2 Installation and Initial Setup
3 Operation
4 Detailed Description
5 Maintenance, Fault Location and Repair
6 NAV-LCU 443
7 Control Tower Unit (CTU)
Safety notice system

This manual contains safety notices (differentiated according to the degree of danger) which are to
be observed, to ensure your personal safety and prevent property damage.
! WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
! CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
ATTENTION
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken
into account.
Ed. 08.17 A
RCSE 443 RMMC
Preliminary Remarks Description and Operation
Table of effective pages

Basic edition: 03.10 / Revised version: 08.17
Pages Ed. Remarks
Title 08.17
Info 1 to 2 08.17
A and B 08.17
I to XIII 08.17
AV-1 to 8 08.17
1-1 to 40 08.17
2-1 to 46 08.17
3-1 to 12 08.17
4-1 to 24 08.17
5-1 to 20 08.17
6-1 to 4 08.17 NAV-LCU 443
7-1 to 26 08.17 Control Status Unit (CTU)
Trademarks: Microsoft is a registered trademark, WINDOWS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark of the International
Business Machines Corporation. All other mentioned product names may be trademarks of the respective manufacturers and must be observed.
Note Despite of careful editing work technical inaccuracies and printing faults cannot be excluded in this publication. Change of text remains reserved without notification.
B Ed. 08.17
RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐1
1.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐1
1.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐1
1.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐3
1.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐3
1.2.2 Components of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐3
1.2.2.1 Remote Control and Status Equipment (RCSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐3
1.2.2.2 Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐3
1.2.2.3 Remote Maintenance Center (RMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐3
1.2.2.4 Navaids Local Communication Unit (NAV–LCU 443) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐3
1.2.2.5 Remote Maintenance Subsystem (RMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐4
1.2.3 Hierarchy of RMMC Remote Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐4
1.2.4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐5
1.2.4.1 Local Remote Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐5
1.2.4.2 Remote Control and Status Equipment RCSE 443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐6
1.2.4.3 Remote Control and Monitoring System RCMS 443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐6
1.2.4.4 Remote Maintenance Center RMC 443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐7
1.2.4.5 General Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐7
1.3 MECHANICAL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐11
1.3.1 RCSE: REU with INC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐12
1.4 TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐15
1.4.1 General Data REU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐15
1.4.1.1 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐15
1.4.1.2 Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐15
1.4.1.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐15
1.4.1.4 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐15
1.4.1.5 Reliability Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐15
1.4.1.6 General Data PC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐16
1.4.2 Modems and Distribution Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐16
1.4.2.1 Dialing Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐17
1.4.2.2 Dedicated–line Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐18
1.4.2.3 Distribution Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐19
1.4.2.4 Supported Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐20
1.4.2.5 Modem Replacement Unit LGM Extender 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐20
1.4.2.6 Further Compliance Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐21
1.4.3 General Data INC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐22
1.4.3.1 Housing and Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐22
Ed. 08.17 I
RCSE 443 RMMC
Table of Contents Description and Operation
1.4.3.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐22

1.4.3.3 Main Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐22
1.4.3.4 RCSE Status Indication and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐23
1.4.3.5 Detailed Subsystem Status Indication and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐23
1.4.3.6 Control Functions on an Attached PC with ADRACS User Program . . . . . 1‐24
1.4.4 External GPS Real Time Clock (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐25
1.4.5 Conformity and Licensing Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐25
1.4.6 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐25
1.4.6.1 Work on the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐25
1.4.6.2 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐25
1.4.6.3 Using Lithium Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐26
1.4.6.4 Observation of Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐26
1.4.7 Explanation of Symbols on the RCSE 443 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐27
1.4.8 RCSE 443 Label Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐28
1.5 SHORT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
1.5.1 General Overview RCSE 443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
1.5.2 Control Tower Unit CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
1.5.3 Maintenance Data Terminal / PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
1.5.3.1 PC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
1.5.3.2 Principle of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
1.5.3.3 Internal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
1.5.3.4 External Functions/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
1.5.3.4.1 Designation and Storage of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
1.5.3.4.2 Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
1.5.3.5 System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
1.5.4 Interfaces to Local Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
1.5.4.1 NAVAIDS/ILS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
1.5.4.2 On–site Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33
1.5.4.3 ADRACS Interface to Local PC (Laptop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33
1.5.4.4 Interface for Remote Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33
1.5.5 Interface to LAN Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33
1.5.6 Interface to GPS Clock Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34
1.6 RCSE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35
1.6.1 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35
1.6.2 System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–35
1.6.3 Communication Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36
1.6.3.1 Communication Distributor/History Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
1.6.3.2 Subsystem Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
1.6.3.3 Communication with Navaids 400 and SYSTEM 4000 Stations . . . . . . . . . 1–38
II Ed. 08.17
RMMC RCSE 443
1.6.3.4 Communication via Open Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38

1.6.3.5 History Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39
1.6.3.6 Control of Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39
1.6.4 System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39
1.6.5 Ethernet– and USB–Interface (LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2.2 Cablings and Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2.2.1 AC Mains Cable with Power Cord Specific to the Region or Country . . . . 2–3
2.2.3 Connection of ILS or (D)VOR Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.2.4 RCSE/REU, Pin Assignment of Interface Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.2.4.1 SubD 25 Pin Connectors NFK–1, NFK–2 (male) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.2.4.2 SubD 9 Pin Connectors (male) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2.2.4.3 64 Pin Connectors OIO 1, OIO 2, OIO 3 and S12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.3 INITIAL HARDWARE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.3.1 General Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.3.2 Hardware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.3.2.1 REU, Connector Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.3.2.2 Processor Board ETX-CPU Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.3.2.3 SIB Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.3.2.4 NFK Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22
2.3.2.5 Modem IC LGM 28.8 DL Settings (new model since 2015) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
2.3.2.6 LGM28.8 Settings (obsolete since 2014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
2.3.2.7 LGM64K Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
2.3.2.8 ZUA29 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27
2.3.2.9 ZU1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28
2.3.2.10 LGM9600H1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–29
2.3.2.11 LGM1200MD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
2.3.2.12 INC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31
2.3.2.13 LGM Extender 2 Unit Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
2.3.2.14 OIO Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33
2.3.2.15 Multiplexer RS232 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
2.3.3 Connection to the Public Telephone Network (PTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
2.3.4 Connection to an Ethernet Line (LAN Network Interface Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
2.3.5 Connection to a GPS Real-Time Clock Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
2.4 INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Ed. 08.17 III

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.4.1 Initial Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

2.4.2 Configuration of the REU with PC and ADRACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.1 Actualization of the REU Application Program (REU.EXE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.2 Setting of PTT file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.4.2.3 Explanation of Modem Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.4.3 Faulty Switching–on RCSE Behavior after Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.2 OPERATION OF THE RCSE/REU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.2.1 Switching On the RCSE/REU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.2.2 Switching Off the RCSE/REU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.2.3 General Controls of the INC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.2.3.1 Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.2.3.2 Alarm Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.2.3.3 Brightness up/Brightness down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.2.4 Special Controls of the INC Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.2.5 Configuration Options of INC Panel Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.2.5.1 Subsystem Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.2.5.2 System (RCSE) Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.2.6 Assignment of Station Main Status Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.2.7 Indications and Switches of the REU Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.2.8 Connectors and Indicators of the 28.8 DL Modem ( Mod IC ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.2.9 Operation and Indications of a GPS Real–Time Clock (optional) . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.3 MAINTENANCE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.3.2 Operation with a Maintenance Data Terminal (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.3.3 Operation at the Remote Maintenance Center (RMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
CHAPTER 4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐1
4.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐1
4.2 OVERVIEW OF RCSE SUBASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐1
4.3 REU–SUBASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐2
4.3.1 Processor Board ETX–CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐2
4.3.1.1 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐3
4.3.1.2 Ethernet– and USB Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐3
4.3.1.3 ETX-LX Board, SO-DDR-DIMM 256 MB, CF 4GB with Image . . . . . . . 4‐3
4.3.2 SIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐4
4.3.3 OIO (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐6
4.3.4 ADC (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐6
IV Ed. 08.17
RMMC RCSE 443
4.3.5 Modems LGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐7

4.3.5.1 LGM28.8 DL MOD-IC (new model, since 2015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐7
4.3.5.1.1 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐7
4.3.5.1.2 Connectors and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐8
4.3.5.2 LGM28.8 D1 (obsolete since 2014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐9
4.3.5.3 LGM64K (ISDN Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐10
4.3.5.4 Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐10
4.3.5.4.1 Connection Setup via Switched Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐10
4.3.5.5 Dedicated Line Modem LGM1200MD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐10
4.3.5.6 Dedicated Line Modem LGM9600H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐12
4.3.5.7 LGM Extender 2 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐12
4.3.6 Optional 5th Modem (Modification Kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐13
4.3.7 Modem ZU1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐13
4.3.8 Modem ZUA29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐14
4.3.9 Star Distributor NFK 29–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐15
4.3.10 Multiplexer RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐16
4.3.11 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐17
4.3.11.1 AC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐17
4.3.11.1.1 AC/DC Converter Puls AP346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐17
4.3.11.1.2 AC/DC Converter VERO TRIVOLT PK60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐18
4.3.11.2 DC/DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐19
4.3.11.2.1 DC/DC Converter Puls APD346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐19
4.3.11.2.2 DC/DC Converter MGV–DG37–05121–3G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐19
4.3.11.2.3 DC/DC Converter MGV–DG37–05121–2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐20
4.3.12 INC Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐20
4.4 RCSE 443 SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐21
4.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐21
4.4.1.1 Data Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐21
4.4.1.2 Maintenance Mode and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐21
4.4.2 Communication via Switched Lines (PTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐22
4.4.3 Data Com Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐22
4.4.4 PC Control / PC Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐22
4.4.5 Switch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐22
4.4.6 Runway Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐23
4.4.6.1 Runway Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐23
4.4.6.2 Runway Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐23
4.4.6.3 Automatic Disable (Forced Shutdown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐23
CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE, FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Ed. 08.17 V
RCSE 443 RMMC
5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5.1.2 Elimination of Electrostatic Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2.1 Damage Check and Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.1.1 Cleaning of the Equipment Housing and the INC Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.1.2 Dusting the Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.3 NORMAL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.3.1 Preventive Exchange of the 3 V Lithium Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4 FAULT LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.1 Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.4.2 Testing the Voltage of the 3 V Lithium Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.4.3 Lamp Test of the INC Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.4.4 Reading the Fault Location Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.4.5 Fault Location Table Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.4.6 Overview of Subassembly Fault Location Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.4.7 Fault Location Table RCSE Indication and Control Panel (INC Panel) . . . . . 5–9
5.4.8 Fault Location Table ETX–CPU Processor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.4.9 Fault Location Table SIB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.4.10 Fault Location Table NFK Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.4.11 Fault Location Table Modem LGM28.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.4.12 Fault Location Table Modem LGM64K (ISDN Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.4.13 Fault Location Table Modem ZUA29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.4.14 Fault Location Table Modem ZU1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.15 Fault Location Table Modem LGM9600H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.16 Fault Location Table Modem LGM1200MD (Dedicated Line Modem) . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.17 Fault Location Table LGM Extender 2 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.18 Fault Location Table OIO board (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.4.19 Fault Location Table Multiplexer RS232 (MPX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.5 REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.2 Safety Precautions for Repair Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.2.1 General Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.2.2 Safe Work on the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.2.3 Replacing the AC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.2.4 Replacing the DC Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.3 Repair Works on the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.3.1 Replacing Plug–in Modules and Dismounting/Mounting INC Panel . . . . . 5–18
5.5.3.2 Mounting and Dismounting of the RCSE Rear Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18
5.5.3.3 Replacing the 3 V–Lithium Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
VI Ed. 08.17
RMMC RCSE 443
5.5.4 Trouble–shooting in Case of Problems with Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . 5–20
CHAPTER 6 NAV–LCU 443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1.1 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1.2 Mechanical Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.1.3 General Overview NAV–LCU 443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.2 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.3 MAINTENANCE, FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
CHAPTER 7 CONTROL TOWER UNIT (CTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 MECHANICAL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 TECHNICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3.1 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3.2 Mounting site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3.4 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3.5 CTU Indication and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3.5.1 Subsystem (Station) Status Indication on CTU Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.3.5.2 Control Keys on the CTU Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.3.6 RWY SELECT Indication and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.3.6.1 ILS System Status Indication on the RWY–SELECT Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.3.6.2 RWY–SELECT Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.4 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.4.1 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
7.4.2 Pin Assignment of Interface Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.4.3 Initial Hardware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.4.3.1 General Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.4.3.2 Assignment of Connected Stations (CTU and RWY–SELECT) . . . . . . . . . 7–8
7.4.3.3 Hardware Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.4.3.3.1 Settings using the Switch S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.4.4 Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.4.5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.4.5.1 Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.4.5.2 Switching Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.4.6 Controls of the CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
Ed. 08.17 VII

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.4.6.1 Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12

7.4.6.2 Alarm Silent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.4.6.3 Brightness Up/Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.4.6.4 Enable Runway Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.4.7 CTU Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.4.8 CTU Subsystem Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.4.9 Controls of RWY–SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.4.9.1 Runway Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.4.10 RWY–SELECT System Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.5 CTU/RWY SUBASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.5.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.5.2 CTU/RWY–Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.5.3 AC/DC–Converter MELCHER LM 1001–7R Option A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.5.4 DC/DC–Converter MELCHER BM 1001–7R Option D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.6 MAINTENANCE, FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.6.1 General Introduction to Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.6.1.1 Elimination of Electrostatic Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.6.2 Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.6.2.1 Damage Check and Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.6.2.2 Cleaning of the Equipment Housing and the CTU Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.6.2.3 Dusting the Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.6.3 FAULT LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.6.3.1 Frequently Asked Trouble–Shooting Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.6.3.2 Overview Fault Location Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.6.3.3 Fault Location Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.6.3.4 Fault Location Table CTU Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.6.3.5 Fault Location Table Processor Unit 8051 (PU–51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.6.4 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
VIII Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Abbreviations
ABKÜRZUNGSVERZEICHNIS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
LISTE D'ABREVIATIONS
LISTA DE ABREVIATURAS
AC Alternating Current
Courant alternatif
Corriente alterna
ACC Alternating Current Converter
ADC Analog-Digital Converter
Convertisseur analogique/numérique
Convertidor analógico/digital
ADRACS Automatic Data Recording And Control System
AF Audio Frequency
Basse fréquence
Audiofrequencia
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
Code standard américain pour l'échange d'informations
Código stándard americano para el intercambio de informaciones
ATC Air Traffic Control
Flugsicherung
Contrôle du trafic aérien
Control del tráfico aéreo
AWD Automatische Wähleinrichtung für Datenverbindungen
Automatic dialling equipment for data connections
Dispositif automatique de sélection pour liaisons d'acheminement de données
Dispositivo automático de selección para comunicaciones de datos
AZ Azimuth
BAZ Back-Azimuth
BD Baud
Baud
Baudio
BIOS Basic Input/Output System
BIT(E) Built-in Test (Equipment)
Dispositif de test intégré
Dispositivo de test integrado
Cat. Category
CBP Connector Back Panel
CCITT Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique et Téléphonique
International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Commitee
International beratender Ausschuß für den Telegrafen- und Fernsprechdienst
CEPT Conférence Européenne des Administrations des Postes et des Télécommunications
European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Administrations
Konferenz der Europäischen Post- und Fermeldeverwaltungen
Ed. 08.17 AV‐1

RCSE 443 RMMC
Abbreviations Description and Operation
CLK Clock
Takt
CMOS Complementary Metaloxide Semiconductor
Semi-conducteur oxyde métallique complémentaire
Semiconductor complementario de óxido metálico
CPU Central Processing Unit
Zentrale Prozessoreinheit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSB Control&Status Board (part of the LCSU)
CTS Clear to Send
Prêt à émettre
Listo para transmitir
CTU Control Tower Unit
CVOR Conventional VOR
DC Direct Current
Courant continu
Corriente continua
DCE Data Circuit terminating Equipment
Datenübertragungseinrichtung (DÜE)
DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation
Differenz der Modulationsgrade
Différence de taux de modulation
Diferencia de grados de modulación
DFS Deutsche Flugsicherung
Administration of air navigation services
Bureau de la sécurité aérienne
Instituto de protección de vuelo
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm
German industrial standard
Norme industrielle allemande
Norma industrial alemana
DMA Direct Memory Access
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
Equipement de mesure de la distance
Equipo de medición de la distancia
DRAM Dynamic RAM
DRQ DMA Request
DSR Data Set Ready
Enregistrement des données prêt
Registro de datos listo
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
Datenendeinrichtung (DEE)
DTR Data Terminal Ready
Terminal de données prêt
Terminal de datos listo
AV‐2 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
DVOR Doppler Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range

Radiophare omnidirectionnel VHF Doppler
Radiofaro omnidireccional VHF Doppler
EL Elevation
ELTA Electronic TACAN Antenna
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule, programmable et erasable
Memoria permanente borrable y programada
EUROCAE European Organization for Civil Aviation Electronics
Organisation européenne pour l'électronique de l'aviation civile
Organización europea para la electrónica de la aviacion civil
ETX Embedded Technologies Extended
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
Administration fédérale de l'aviation
Administración federal de aviación
FAT Factory Acceptance Test
FFM Farfield Monitor
(FF) Moniteur de champ lointain (zone Fraunhofer)
Monitor campo lejano
FSD FACE Standard DME
FSK Frequency-Shift Keying
Frequenzumtastverfahren
Manipulation par déplacement de fréquence
Método de manipulación de frecuencia
FTA FACE TACAN
GND Ground
Erde
GP (GS) Glide Path (Glide Slope)
Radiophare d'alignement de descente
Transmisor de trayectoria de descenso
GUI Graphical User Interface
HDLC High-level Data Link Protocol

ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
Organisation de l'aviation civile internationale (OACI)
Organización de aviación civil international (OACI)
ILS Instrument Landing System
Système d'atterrissage aux instruments
Sistema de aterrizaje por instrumentos
INC Indication and Control
Anzeige und Steuerung
IOM Input/Output Manager
Ed. 08.17 AV‐3

RCSE 443 RMMC
I/O Input/Output
Eingang/Ausgang
entrée/sortie
entrada/salida
IP Internet Protocol
IRQ Interrupt Request
Unterbrechungsanforderung
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
Dienste-integrierendes digitales Netzwerk
ISO International Organization for Standardization
Internationale Organisation für Normung
Organisation Internationale de Normalisation
ITU International Telecommunication Unit
Internationale Fernmeldeunion
Union Internationale des Télécommunications
KDI Keyboard and Display
LAN Local Area Network
LAPB Link Access Procedure Balanced
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
Ecran à cristaux liquides
Indicador de cristal liquido
LCP Link Control Protocol
LCSU Local Control and Status Unit
LCU Local Communication Unit
LED Light Emitting Diode
Diode électroluminiscente
Diodo electroluminiscente
LGM Modembezeichnung (LOGEM)
Modem designation (LOGEM)
LLZ (LOC) Localizer
Radiophare d'alignement de piste
Localizador
LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MBP Motherboard Back Panel
MFM Memory Filecard Module
MLS Microwave Landing System
Système d'atterrissage aux micro-ondes
Sistema de aterrizaje por microondas
MM Middle Marker
Radiobalise médiane
Radiobaliza intermedia
AV‐4 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
MON Monitor
Moniteur
Monitor
MOSFET Metallic Oxide Semiconductor Field-effect transistor
NAV Navigation
Navigation
Navigation
Navegación
NCP Network Control Protocol
NDB Non-Directional radio Beacon
Radiophare omnidirectional
Radiofaro omnidireccional
NF Niederfrequenz
Audio frequency
Basse fréquence
Baja frecuencia
NFK Niederfrequenzknoten (Sternverteiler)
Star distributor (for audio frequency)
NMI Non-Maskable Interrupt
Nicht-maskierbarer Interrupt
OACI = ICAO, Organisation de l'aviation civile internationale
International Civil Aviation Organization
Organización de aviación civil international
OIO Opto coupler isolated Input/Output
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OTP Overtemperature Protection
Übertemperaturschutz
OVP Overvoltage Protection
Überspannungsschutz
PC Personal Computer
PE Protection Earth
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
Punkt-zu-Punkt Protokoll
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule et programmable
Memoria permanente programada
PSTN Public-Switched Telephone Network
PTT Post Telephone and Telecommunications (authority)
PU Processor Unit
RAM Random Access Memory
Mémoire à accés aléatoire
Memoria de acceso aleatorio
Ed. 08.17 AV‐5

RCSE 443 RMMC
RCMS Remote Control Monitoring System

Système de télécommande et de surveillance
Sistema de control y monitoreo remotos
RCSI Remote Control and Status Indicator
RCSU Remote Control Status Unit
RD Read
Reg. Regulator
Regler
REU Remote Electronic Unit
RMC Remote Maintenance Center
RMC-C Central Remote Maintenance Center
RMMC Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Configuration
ROM Read Only Memory
Mémoire à lecture seule
Memoria permanente
RSU Remote Status Unit
RTC Real-Time Clock
Echtzeituhr
RTS Request to send
Marche l'émetteur
Activación del transmisor
RWY Runway
Landebahn
RX Receiver
Empfänger
Récepteur
Receptor
RXD Receiver Data
Données de récepteur
Datos de receptor
SIB Serial Interface Board
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SW Switch
Schalter
Commutateur
Conmutador
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation
Navigation aérienne tactique
Navigación aérea táctica
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TTL Transistor-Transistor Logic
Logique transistor-transistor
Lógica transistor - transistor
AV‐6 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
TX Transmitter
Emetteur
Transmisor
TXD Transmitter Data
Données d'émetteur
Datos de transmisor
UDP User Datagram Protocol
VOR Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range
Radiophare omnidirectionnel VHF
Radiofaro omnidireccional VHF
VRC Vertical Redundancy Check
WAN Wide Area Network
WIN Windows (Microsoft)
WR Write
WS Wait States
ZU Zeichenumsetzer
Modem for data transfer
Convertisseur de signaux
Convertidor de señal
Ed. 08.17 AV‐7

RCSE 443 RMMC
AV‐8 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description, Operation and Maintenance General
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Introduction
The Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Configuration (RMMC) is used for remote monitoring, op
eration and maintenance of all the connected navigation systems. The network has a radially config
ured architecture, based on communication between the system components via switched or private
lines in the public network and dedicated lines in private networks. Optionally, a connection to a LAN
(local area network) via Ethernet line is possible.
The remote control instruments allow all the networked navigation systems to be operated optionally
from central points, from normal operation of the dual systems with automatic changeover in the event
of a fault through manual operation to measurement and setting of all the possible signal parameters,
as well as detailed fault analyses on the basis of a wide range of measured values. They facilitate new
maintenance strategies, whereby primary importance is placed on concentrating logistics and quali
fied personnel, and then on responding to specific failures with systematic maintenance activities
rather than relying on periodic precautionary measures. This considerably improves both mainte
nance efficiency and the economic efficiency of the systems throughout their service life.
Although these advantages only apply to the modern generation of air traffic control systems devel
oped by Thales ATM (in other words to the Navaids 400/SYSTEM 4000 and the navigation aids used
with it, namely the CVOR and DVOR, the ILS and MLS instrument landing systems, the ILS farfield
monitor (FFM), the TACAN 453 and the DME 415 radio beacons, the electronic TACAN antenna (ELTA
200) and the NDB 436) the extensive range of interface boards makes it possible to incorporate other
collocated systems in the remote control and monitoring strategy if desired. The outstanding features
of the system are as follows:
- EXTREME FLEXIBILITY
The open system architecture enables a variety of standard connections to be established using dedi
cated or switched lines, telephone or data networks, local area networks and serial or parallel inter
faces. The many different interface boards and software utilities which are available allow the system
configuration to be adapted to local requirements. A remote maintenance and monitoring configura
tion which provides a permanent indication of the availability of all the navigation systems in the net
work can, for example, be set up via the public telephone network. As an option of the processor
board an Ethernet connector enables the connection of the REU to a LAN to transfer status informa
tion from the RCSE to a host PC or workstation.
- EXCEPTIONAL RELIABILITY
All data communication is implemented using reliable data protocols. The instruments are designed
for the operating conditions specified in the EUROCAE recommendations. The DIN plug‐in connec
tions ensure excellent contact is made between the subassemblies and the bus board. There are no
mechanical wearing parts, and even disk drives for storing data have been dispensed with.
Ed. 08.17 1‐1

RCSE 443 RMMC
General Description, Operation and Maintenance
- USER–FRIENDLY OPERATOR INTERFACES
To allow the user to work in a familiar environment, the currently prevailing PC standards and operat
ing systems have been employed. All the control, monitoring and maintenance functions are dis
played on a color screen. They are executed in windows by means of function keys or a mouse. The
most important status indications and control elements are implemented on the front panel of the ba
sic instrument, so that simplified remote control and monitoring is also possible without connecting
a PC system.
- LOW EQUIPMENT COSTS
Due to the use of standard PC technology, the system is situated in the lower price range for computer
networks and remote control and maintenance systems. The RMMC is a complete, autonomous sys
tem. However, it can also be used as a gateway to more complex data processing systems.
RMC 443
Remote Maintenance Center
RCSE 443
INC
REU
PTT
RCMS 443
Remote Control and Monitoring System
Host
RCSE 443
Remote Control and
Status Equipment
INC
REU LAN
RCMS 443
Host
Stations
RCMS 443
Other systems
Fig. 1‐1 Overview RMMC
1‐2 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.2.1 General
The Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Configuration (RMMC) is a flexible information processing
network for remote control, monitoring and maintenance of navigational aids systems for air traffic
control. In addition to the usual remote control functions, it enables all the possible signal parameters
to be set and read, and permits extensive remote analysis of system failures by polling and interpret
ing a wide range of measured values.
1.2.2 Components of the System

1.2.2.1 Remote Control and Status Equipment (RCSE)
The RCSE is intended to be installed in the maintenance equipment room. It provides separate status
display and on/off–control functions for all Navaids equipment, and mechanisms to change and dis
play auxiliary data words for MLS. The RCSE consists of the Remote control Electronic Unit (REU)
with an INdication and Control (INC) panel. The RCSE is interfacing with one or two Control Tower
Units (CTU), with a maintenance data terminal (PC). The CTU is intended for installation in the ATC
control tower. It provides system 'main status' indications and may provide a separate status display
for each Navaids subsystem as well as switching the ILS or MLS to the active runway (RWY–SELECT,
optional). The CTU is separately described in chapter 7.
NOTE: As an option, a slave RCSE panel unit defined as Remote Status Unit (RSU) with an 'old'
version of indication panel (RPU) can be connected to the RCSE, but this equipment is
no more available, and therefore not considered within this document.
1.2.2.2 Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS)

The RCMS is the equipment used for maintenance and control of ILS or MLS landing systems. The
basic configuration of the RCMS contains the RCSE and a maintenance data terminal (PC) to perform
the RCMS functions.
1.2.2.3 Remote Maintenance Center (RMC)

RMC is the equipment used at Regional (RMC–R) or at Central (RMC–C) site. The basic configuration
of the RMC contains the RCSE and a maintenance data terminal (PC) to perform the RMC functions.
The operational mode of the RMC is defined by a software different from the RCMS software.
1.2.2.4 Navaids Local Communication Unit (NAV–LCU 443)

The NAV–LCU 443 is a device used as local communication interface between en–route navigation
systems TACAN, ELTA, CVOR, DVOR and the RMC. The NAV–LCU comprises the Remote control
Electronic Unit (REU), which is equipped according to the specific requirements of the NAV station.
It serves as a communication interface between the connected equipment and the public switched
network (PTT), and as a common point for connecting a service terminal (Laptop PC) for commission
ing and maintenance purposes.
In Navaids 400 en–route navigation systems (e.g. CVOR 431) no separate NAV–LCU device has to
be used as local communication interface. The NAV‐LCU functionality is integrated in the Navaids 400
subrack, i.e. the LCU software is running on the already existing LCSU/CSB board, additional mo
dems are used for communication purposes.
NOTE: Chapter 6 of this technical manual gives additional information to design, technical data
and installation of the separate device NAV–LCU 443.
Ed. 08.17 1‐3

RCSE 443 RMMC
1.2.2.5 Remote Maintenance Subsystem (RMS)

The RMS is used within MLS system configurations as an additional controller system separate from
the RCMS to perform maintenance, data gathering and alarm determination functions for the various
pieces of equipment being supervised. It consists of the REU and a maintenance data terminal (PC)
installed in the maintenance equipment room and is also interfaced via a modem to the stations,
which are available to communicate to both the RCMS and the RMS equipment.
1.2.3 Hierarchy of RMMC Remote Control Equipment

At the top, the Central Remote Maintenance Center (RMC–C) is used to obtain an overview of the
status of all systems. The RMC–C is connected via dialing modems to the PTT to obtain serial data
from the RMC–R, NAV–LCU 443 or RCMS 443.
At the RMC–R the main status of all enroute equipments (VOR, DME–Transponder and
TACAN–Ground Stations) of one defined region are displayed continuously at an INC panel. Besides
enroute systems, the main status indications of the ILS and MLS landing systems are also displayed
for maintenance purposes. The RMC–R is also connected to the PTT via dialing modems. For special
applications a dedicated line may be installed. For maintenance activities at the screen of the PC
maintenance data is displayed. The maintenance technician obtains all the data from the subsystems
configured for this region with defined menus on the screen of the data terminal (PC). It is possible
to use the ADRACS (Automatic Data Recording And Control Software) software for maintenance pur
poses to control Navaids 400 ILS/MLS and enroute subsystems or SYSTEM 4000 equipment at the
remote site. For ELTA, DME, or TACAN subsystems special PC supervisory programs are employed.
The RCMS 443 and the NAV–LCU 443 are link control units and provide central points for communica
tion between RMC's and the Navaids systems. While the RCMS is connected via twisted telephone
line pairs and modems to the ILS/MLS–systems the NAV–LCU 443 has direct RS232/422 interfaces
to the VOR, TACAN/DME and ELTA–equipment. For small projects, it is possible to connect the
NAV–LCU of en–route navigation systems via switched lines to an RCMS.
RMC-C Remote Maintenance Center

CENTRAL
Remote Maintenance Center
REGIONAL
RMC-R RMC-R RMC-R
PTT
RMS RCMS 443 ILS
NAV-LCU 443
LLZ GP MM
LCSU/CSB
RCMS 443 MLS
VOR CVOR 431
4000 TAC ELTA
AZ EL DME/P TAC ELTA
Fig. 1‐2 Hierarchy of the remote control subsystems
1‐4 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
The protocols for serial data communication between the RCMS 443 and the navaids landing subsys
tems (ILS/MLS) and between the NAV–LCU 443 and the en–route navaids subsystems (VOR, DME/
TACAN) are harmonized to Navaids 400, MLS, ELTA and SYSTEM 4000. According to these proto
cols, the subsystem data is continuously polled by the link control unit with commands for the status
messages. To get specific messages for maintenance a scheduled and also specific polling is pro
vided. The specified frames used in the protocols are defined to obtain an optimum of information
within short time intervals with the highest data integrity. A data communication error is indicated in
case of command telegrams not followed by correct message telegrams.
In case that a switched line connection is used and there is a change in system status, the NAV–LCU
443 or the RCMS 443 initiates a dialing procedure to the dedicated RMC–R which then polls the new
status message. Besides the status, maintenance data may also be added. With respect to
DME–transponder DME 415/435 and TACAN–equipment TAC 453, the protocols do not follow the
polling procedure as described before. These subsystems also deliver messages to the NAV–LCU
without a request by command telegrams. The used protocol serves maintenance data terminal (PC)
menus for the following functions:
– about 10 standard procedures,
– login/logout and password procedures
– routine check for history storage with about 50 measurements.
1.2.4 System Configuration

1.2.4.1 Local Remote Control Interface
The Navaids stations communicate with the remote control system in different ways. The remote con
trol interfaces which are provided locally vary according to the type of installation:
Type Modem Baudrate Remark
Dedicated ZU1 600 baud SYSTEM 4000

line (up to end of '92)
ZUA29 1200 baud (V.23) SYSTEM 4000 (since 1993),
NAV 400, MLS
LGM1200MD 600/1200 baud (V.23) SYSTEM 4000,

party line NAV 400, MLS
LGM9600H1 1200 baud (V.23), ILS/MK20A

half duplex
LGM14.4 1200...19200 baud (V.32) NAV 400

(up to end of 2000)
LGM28.8 1200...38400 baud (V.34) NAV 400 (since 2000)
Std. bus modem 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 DME 415/435, TAC 453
LGM724 desktop 2400 baud (V.22bis) ELTA–200
Switched line LGM28.8 up to 28.8k baud NAV–LCU 443,

LGM64K (ISDN) 64k baud NAV 400
LGM928 desktop 1200...38400 baud (V.34) NAV 400 (since 2001)
Ed. 08.17 1‐5

RCSE 443 RMMC
1.2.4.2 Remote Control and Status Equipment RCSE 443

The RCSE is an REU with an Indication and Control (INC) panel. It can be used as a simple, yet com
plete, remote control unit. The INC indicates the states of up to eight substations with the following
LED displays: ALARM, WARNING, NORMAL, DATA COMmunication and MAINTENance.
An alarm tone is sounded if a status changes. Each station can be selected by pressing a membrane
button, in order to activate the EQUIPment ON, OFF and CHANGEOVER functions and to indicate
specific monitor alarms. An additional status indication device is the Control Tower Unit (CTU), which
is described in chapter 7.
A variety of interface boards is available for serial or parallel data I/O, installing an ETHERNET inter
face, connecting a PC and dialing via the public network (PTT), so that the system has a considerable
potential for expansion. The connections to the NAV stations are set up via modems and telephone
lines (600 ohms). The control and indication panels are connected by means of serial RS422 inter
faces.
1.2.4.3 Remote Control and Monitoring System RCMS 443

The maintenance, fault analysis and documentation functions of the RMMC are implemented by con
necting a PC system to the RCSE and installing the RMS or RCMS application software on it. The
difference in the names is a reflection of the definitions laid down by the U.S. FAA. An RMS designed
for maintenance purposes has direct, permanent access to the navigation systems via separate cable
connections, and is operated independently of the RCSE, while an RCMS uses the same communica
tion paths for the maintenance functions as it does for remote control and monitoring.
The following functions are provided by the application software:
– System status indication for each connected system
– Permanent indication of the general status of all systems
– Permanent indication of the current date and time
– Detailed status indications for a selected system
– Polling, display and setting of system parameters
– Polling of internal measured values (BITE)
– Continuous monitoring of parameters (either printout if a programmable limit value is reached or
periodic polling)
– 5–level password protection
– Configuration of the remote maintenance and monitoring system
– Loading and saving of setups for operation
– Logbook function, status and alarm history memories
– Selection of data to be printed out
1‐6 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.2.4.4 Remote Maintenance Center RMC 443
If a maintenance center is installed, it is possible to connect several different remote control systems
to a central REU via switched lines. The general status of all the remote control systems in the network
is indicated permanently on one or more INC panels. Any change in a status causes a connection
to be set up automatically from the NAV–LCU or the RCSE to the responsible center and all the current
status information to be transmitted. The center can also be set up to poll the regional stations periodi
cally.
The center is fully equipped to exchange such data with the networked systems which is necessary
for it to be able to perform a detailed fault diagnosis. It communicates either directly with en–route
navigation systems via switched connections or with ILS substations via the Remote Control and Sta
tus Equipment (RCSE) at each airfield.
1.2.4.5 General Examples
Fig. 1‐3 illustrates the function of the RCMS 443 ILS. Besides the ILS subsystems, terminal CVOR/
DME has also an interface to the RCSE 443 ILS. The number of subsystems connected to the RCSE
443 is shown to demonstrate the variety of subsystems. In fact the figure is limited to a maximum of
12 connected lines.
Fig. 1‐4 shows a configuration for Cat.I operation for MLS (with combined data link for status transfer
and maintenance data). The LRCI used for MLS equipment is replaced in the case of DME/TACAN
equipment by input/output managers (IOM). The RCSE 443 displays the status of two MLS systems
with Azimuth (AZ), Elevation (EL) and DME/P. The AZ station of the MLS for the runway direction not
in use is used as Back–Azimuth. The MLS subsystems may also contain additional RMC–modems
(optional).
Fig. 1‐5 – a simple RMMC for ILS – shows the function of the RCSE in more detail. The Navaids 400
subsystems (LLZ, GP, FFM and Marker) are shown connected via a star distributor (NFK29) to a com
mon modem. In the polling procedure the subsystems are interrogated sequentially in time multiplex
mode. As shown in Fig. 1‐5, for the function of the RCSE 443 the status of the DME 415 (also TAC
453) is transferred via parallel lines to the collocated Navaids 400 equipment. The status of the DME/
TACAN is transmitted to the REU of the RCSE 443 ILS within the Navaids 400 protocol.
Alternatively the Navaids 400 subsystems may be connected to the RCSE via dedicated line modems
LGM1200MD, operated in party line mode. On replacement, the LGM1200MD is used in the RCSE
instead of common modem and NFK star distributor. This is shown in Fig. 2‐4.
A second alternative is the usage of a Multiplexer RS232 board instead of the NFK star distributor
within the RCSE. In this case the ILS stations are connected via RS232 (or RS422) dedicated lines
to the RCSE (see Fig. 1‐5).
Ed. 08.17 1‐7

RCSE 443 RMMC
to Maintenance Center Ethernet (LAN), optional

(PTT line)
RMMC
RCSE 443
additional
MODEM Ethernet IF
panels
CTU RWY
SELECT
REU
INC
NAV-LCU
MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM KDI IOM CU
FFM Marker ELTA
VOR DME
LLZ GP DME DVOR TACAN
SYSTEM 2 (S 4000)
MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM CSB CU
FFM Marker ELTA
CVOR DME
LLZ GP DME DVOR TACAN
SYSTEM 1 (NAV 400)
Fig. 1‐3 RMMC for two ILS and VOR/DME/TACAN (example)
1‐8 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
to Maintenance Center Ethernet (LAN), optional

(PTT line)
RMMC
RCSE 443
additional
MODEM (optional) Ethernet IF
panels
CTU RWY
SELECT
REU
INC
MODEM
MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM MODEM
LRCI LRCI LRCI LRCI LRCI LRCI
AZ EL BAZ AZ EL BAZ
(opt.) (opt.)
SYSTEM 1 SYSTEM 2
Fig. 1‐4 RMMC for MLS (example)
Ed. 08.17 1‐9

RCSE 443 RMMC
RMC 443
INC
REU
SIB
DIAL MODEM LGM
MAINTENANCE CENTER
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
PTT LINES
AIRPORT
RCSE 443 TOWER
REU DIAL MODEM LGM

RSU 1) RS4222)
CTU RWY
RS4222) SELECT
INC
SIB
MODEMS LGM
STATIONS
(Navaids 400)
MODEM
MODEM 3) MODEM 3) MODEM 3) MODEM 3) MODEM
M 4000
LLZ FFM Marker GP DME
1) RSU with 'old' indication 2) RS422 interface to equipment situated 3) alternatively the ILS stations can be connected
panel RPU can be used in a different building than RCSE - via RS232 or RS422 dedicated lines to the RCSE
LGM Extender 2 Unit has to be used! (Multiplexer RS232 board is used in RCSE,
RS232 interfaces instead of modem within ILS
stations)
Fig. 1‐5 RCMS 443 for one Navaids ILS 420 with 5 (6) subsystems, connected to RMC 443
1‐10 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.3 MECHANICAL DESIGN
The components of the RCMS to be combined to various configurations are (see Fig. 1‐6):
– the RCSE 443 consisting of the REU in various configurations with the INC panel,
– a Maintenance Data Terminal (PC/laptop and printer) and
– optionally one or more CTUs (cascaded) with RWY–SELECT, see chapter 7.
– optionally an external GPS clock module
Maintenance Data Terminal with printer GPS clock
RCSE with REU and INC
INC
CTU and RWY-SELECT
CTU and RWY-SELECT
Fig. 1‐6 RCMS components (configuration example)
Ed. 08.17 1‐11

RCSE 443 RMMC
1.3.1 RCSE: REU with INC
EQUIPMENT RC
MAIN STATUS DETAILED STATUS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MON 1 MON 2 TX 1 TX 2
CONTROL STATION
SIL
COMMAND
SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT EQUIP CHANG REQUES LAMP
ON/OFF E T TEST
OVER RELEASE
19”-cabinet
550x197x450 [WxHxD mm]
REU 19” subrack

482x131x380 (D+40 for fuses)
[WxHxD mm]
INC
426.4x128.6
[WxH mm]
NOTE: As an option, a RCSE with doubled INC panel (on top of each other) is available to monitor and control the status
of up to 16 subsystems (enlargement kit, for ref. no. see section 4.2).
Fig. 1‐7 RCSE: REU with doubled INC
1‐12 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Front Panel (INC removed)

Equipped with DC/DC converter
PC2
6)
Processor Board
OIO1 / ADC1)
1)
1)
OIO2
OIO3
PC1
2), 3)
5)
LGMx 3
LGMx 4
LGMx 1
LGMx 2
2)
2)
2)
NFK 1
NFK 2
4)
ZUx
SIB
7)
LGM x = LGM28.8, LGM9600H1 or LGM64K (ISDN) DC/DC converter
ZUx = ZUA29 or ZU1
1) optional
2) LGM1200MD at LGM4 instead of NFK1/2 and ZUx or Multiplexer RS232 instead of NFK and ZUx.
3) LGM Extender 2 Unit at LGM4 to connect devices (e.g. CTU) situated in other building, (i.e. different GNDs)
via RS422 without potential difference.
4) RJ45 network link interface to connect the RCSE to a LAN network.
5) USB connectors (2)
6) LEDs on component side of processor board to indicate state of watchdog and battery and access on flash disk
(see section 2.3.2.2).
7) if a 5th modem is being used together with the optional modification kit, the location of the DC/DC (AC/DC)
converter is modified.
Back panel
LGM1 1sA 1a2/PC1

VAC 115/230 V 2AT 1) OIO 1 OIO 2 S12
NFK-1 LGM2 1sB 2a2/PC2

2)
6.3.AT
VDC LGM3 2sA/422 2a1/CTU
36-72 V
+- 1AT
LGM4 1+2a3/422 1a1/RSU 1AT -12V +12V
NFK-2
ZUA 1a3
DC/DC
ON IN/OUT 2a3
1)
OFF
1) connector not used

2) LAN opening optionally used for
RJ45 adapter, see section 2.3.4
Fig. 1‐8 REU, front panel open, and back panel (example)
Ed. 08.17 1‐13

RCSE 443 RMMC
1‐14 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.4 TECHNICAL DATA

The RCSE 443 device fulfills the EMC requirements of EC Guideline 89/336/EEC. It bears the CE des
ignation (see section 1.4.5).
Two product models are available:
RCSE 443 AC/DC P/N 83011 38587
RCSE 443 DC/DC P/N 83011 38586.
1.4.1 General Data REU

NOTE: The following sections are also valid for the NAV–LCU 443, the differences in the used
components are described in chapter 6 of this document.
1.4.1.1 Housing
All REU components are housed in a 19”–subrack. All the slide–in units and plug–in boards are de
signed in the standard single Eurocard format and have DIN plug connectors. The REU is subdivided
into three logical units:
– PC unit with max. 7 boards
– Modem units with max. 7 boards
– Power supply (1 plug–in unit)
Each REU is fitted with a series of standard components and can be extended by a number of optional
or alternative plug–in units, depending on the application.
The 19” subrack is normally mounted in a separate housing (Fig. 1‐7).
1.4.1.2 Dimensions and Weight

Dimensions Standard 19–inch rack, 3HU,
H 134 mm x W 483 mm x D 383 mm
all boards in single Eurocard format.
Weight approx. 15 kg
1.4.1.3 Power Supply

The REU can be supplied with either AC/DC or DC/DC power supplies. The power supply can be one
of the following AC/DC or DC/DC converters:
AC input Puls AP346 nom. 100 to 240 VAC (85 to 265 VAC)
Frequency range nom. 50/60 Hz (47 to 63 Hz)
DC input Puls APD346 (until 2008) nom. 36 to 72 VDC (30 to 90 VDC)
MGV DG37–05121–3G (since 2009) nom. 36 to 72 VDC (40 to 80 VDC)
Power consumption max. 40 VA
Current input (max.) 1.3 A
1.4.1.4 Environmental Conditions

Operation ambient temperature 0 to 65 °C
relative humidity 10 to 90 %
Storage ambient temperature –10 to +85 °C
relative humidity 5 to 95 %
1.4.1.5 Reliability Specification
Serial MTBF (MTBD) > 20000 h
Ed. 08.17 1‐15

RCSE 443 RMMC
1.4.1.6 General Data PC Unit

The PC unit consists of up to 7 Eurocards running on the MCE–bus backplane (PC/AT–compatible
bus).
The processor board is the essential part of the PC unit, whereas the following board is actually used:
- Processor board ETX–CPU with:
· National SemiconductorE GeodeTM GX1 CPU with max. 300 MHz clock,
· DRAM (System RAM): standard: 1GB ; max. 4 GB (optional)
· Watchdog
· Real time clock (battery–backed)
· Flash disk (SAN disk, acts like a hard disk) with up to 1 GB, integrated on IDE bus, devided
into two partitions: drive 'c:' containing DR–DOS 7.03 and REU application software and
drive 'd:' containing the configuration files and the data files (e.g. for history)
· 2 USB connectors (PC); not supported by software; (inactive)
· Ethernet controller with 10/100Base–T Twisted Pair (RJ45) network interface to connect the
RCSE to a LAN network
The further configuration depends on the application requirements. The system can hold and control:
- Serial Interface Board (SIB):
· 10 channels (interrupt–driven):
2x RS422/485
2x RS232
1x TTL, 1x TTL or RS422/485
2x adjustable on TTL or RS232
2x adjustable on TTL or RS422/485 or RS232
· each channel is fully interrupt–driven
· transmission rate: 0 ... 38400 baud.
The following cards are optional available for special applications:

- Opto–isolated Input/Output card (OIO):
· max. 3 cards with 32 inputs/outputs max. for each card, variable
- Analog/Digital converter card (ADC):
· 13–bit AD–conversion with
· 16 channels single–ended or
· 8 channels double–ended.
1.4.2 Modems and Distribution Units

The modem compartment holds the possible dial modems (LGMx), dedicated–line modems (ZUx)
and dedicated–line star–distributors (NFK29). It is equipped with a specially designed wiring board
to match the different plug connectors and pin configurations. The wiring board has seven slots. The
four left–hand slots are reserved for switched–line modems (LGM28.8 or LGM64K) with the standard
CEPT 96–pin configuration. The next slot is used for the dedicated–line modem ZUx (ZU1 or ZUA29)
and the two right–hand slots accommodate the star distributor NFK29. Alternatively it may be re
placed by the Multiplexer RS232 board. All the line inputs are designed for connecting balanced 600
ohm cables and are protected against overvoltage conditions by metal–oxide varistors. The following
modems are used at present:
1‐16 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
- Standard dialing modem LGM28.8 V.21, V.22, V.22bis, V.32, V.32bis, V.34;
V.25bis, V.42bis; dialing modem;
LGM28.8 fibre optic (optional) Standard LGM28.8 with fibre optic connectors
- ISDN dialing modem LGM64K D–channel (DSS1, 1TR6), B–channel data transmission
- Dedicated line modem ZUA29 V.23, 1200 Baud
- Dedicated line modem ZU1 600 Baud
- LGM1200MD partyline V.23, (600 or) 1200 baud, half duplex
- Dedicated line modem LGM9600H1 V.21, V.22, V.22bis, V.23, V.26bis, V.27ter, V.29; half duplex
- Star–distributors NFK29 Each distributor can handle and switch up to six telephone
(max. 2 hardwired) channels. The two NFK29 work together with modem ZU1
or ZUA29.
- Multiplexer RS232 (MPX) Each multiplexer can handle and switch up to six RS232
(max. 2 ) or RS422 channels.
- LGM Extender Unit Converts TTL to RS232/RS422 signal (e.g. for radio links).
- opt. 5th modem An optional modem modification kit (ref. no. xxx) enables to
establish a dualized connection from the RCSE to a certain
station using a 5th modem, see section 4.3.6.
1.4.2.1 Dialing Modems

- Standard Dialing Modem LGM28.8 DL Mod IC (since 2015)
Transmission modes V.34 (2.400 bit/s, 4.800 bit/s, 7.200 bit/s, 9.600 bit/s,
12.000 bit/s, 14.400 bit/ s, 16.800 bit/s, 19.200 bit/s,
21.600 bit/s, 24.000 bit/s, 26.800 bit/s, 28.800 bit/s, duplex)
asynchronous
V.32bis (14.400 bit/s and 12.000 bit/s, duplex) async.
V.32 (4.800 bit/s, 7.200 bit/s and 9.600 bit/s, duplex)
asynchronous
V.22bis (2.400 bit/s, duplex) asynchronous
V.22 (1.200 bit/s, duplex) asynchronous
V.23 (75/1.200 bit/s, 1.200/75 bit/s, duplex) asynchronous
V.21 (300 bit/s, duplex) asynchronous
I / O Interfaces Line Interface 1x FKS8 connector, at the front
Dielectric Strength ref. to ITU‐T K.21, 2 kV
VG Ledge 96‐pole, to DIN 41612, at the back;
V.24 TTL / CMOS
Data Transmission Protocols V.34, V.32bis, V.32, V.23 dx, V.22bis, V.22, V.21
Speed Asynchronous 300 to 28,800 bit/s
Configuration Terminal (AT ‐ Commands), DIP switch
Approvals / Safety Electromagnetic Immunity DIN EN 61000‐6‐2:2006‐03
Electromagnetic Emissions DIN EN 61000‐6‐3:2011‐09
Electrical Safety DIN EN 60950‐1:2011
Display Status 6 LED's, at the front
Operating Voltage Voltage Supply 5 VDC, ± 5%
Power Input < 300 mA
Operating conditions Operating Temperature ‐25°C to +70°C
Ed. 08.17 1‐17

RCSE 443 RMMC
- Standard Dialing Modem LGM28.8D1 (obsolete since 2014)

Transmission mode V.21 (300 bit/s, duplex) asynchronous
V.22 (1200 bit/s, duplex) synchronous and asynchronous
V.22bis (2400 bit/s, duplex) synch. and asynch.
V.23 (75/1200, 1200/75 bit/s, asym. duplex) asynch.
V.32 (4800, 7200, 9600 bit/s; duplex) synch./asynch.
V.32bis (14400 bit/s, 12000 bit/s, duplex) synch./asynch.
V.34 (2400 ... 28800 bit/s, duplex) synch. and asynch.
Control interface V.24, TTL, connector CEPT standard
Dialing Pulse or multi–frequency, FLASH/GROUND key function
Transmit level –10 dBm
Receive level –43 ... 0 dBm, adjustable
- ISDN Dialing Modem LGM64K
Transmission rate to DTE 300 to 115,200 bit/s, duplex, asynchronous
600 to 64,000 bit/s, duplex, synchronous
Line attenuation for S0 installation 6 dB/96 Hz
Unbalanced attenuation for S0 install. > 43 dB
1.4.2.2 Dedicated–line Modems

- Dedicated–line Modem ZUA29
Transmission mode V.23 (fdown=1300 Hz, fup=2100 Hz)
Baudrate 1200 bit/s, half–duplex (sync.,async.)
Control interface V.24, RS232 or RS422 specification
Transmit level –45 ... 0 dBm, adjustable
Maximum line attenuation handled by 43 dB (at 0 dBm Tx level)
the receiver
Adjustable receive attenuation 0 ... 36 dB
- Dedicated–line Modem ZU1

Transmission mode V.23 modified (fdown=1320 Hz, fup=2760 Hz)
Baudrate 600 bit/s, half duplex (async.)
Control interface V.24, RS232 or RS422 specification
Transmission level –36 ... 0 dBm, adjustable
Maximum line attenuation handled by 36 dB (at 0 dBm Tx level)
the receiver
Adjustable receive attenuation 0 ... 36 dB
1‐18 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
- Dedicated–line Modem LGM1200MD Partyline

Principle Frequency–shift keying (V.23)
Telegraphic speed 600 or 1200 baud, half duplex (sync., async.)
Code any
Center frequency at up to 1200 bit/s Outgoing: 1300 Hz
Incoming: 2100 Hz
Frequency deviation ± 400 Hz
Transmit level –6 dBm, adjustable to ±0, –3, –9 dBm
Receive level – 43 dBm, adjustable to –33 dBm,
Interface to CSB V.24
Telephone trunk line 2–wire, 300 ohms (remote side, e.g. RCSE)
- Dedicated–line Modem LGM9600H1

Transmission mode V.21, V.22, V.22bis, V.23, V.26bis, V.27ter, V.29
in half duplex mode
Control interface V.24, TTL, connector CEPT standard
Dialing pulse or multi–frequency,
FLASH– and GROUND–key function supported
Transmit level –10 dBm
Receive level –43 ... 0 dBm, adjustable
LGM9600H1 is used as dedicated line modem to connect a Wilcox MK20A station to the RCSE.
1.4.2.3 Distribution Units
- Star–distributor NFK29
Multiplexed lines 6 independent lines to switch
Amplification (transmit/receive) 0 dB / 20 dB
Channel decoupling 60 dB
Inputs Separate opto–isolated switching inputs for each line
Drive capability One dedicated line modem can operate two NFK29
Line connection 2 or 4–wire telephone cable
Line protection Lightning protection is provided for each channel with metal
oxide varistors
- Multiplexer RS232
Output channels 6 channels configurable to modes RS232, RS422 and TTL
Output signals RS232: TXD, RXD, GND of 6 channels or

RS422: +TXD, –TXD, +RXD, –RXD of 6 channels,
led to NFK–1/2 connector to connect ILS stations via
RS232/RS422 dedicated lines
Input signals TXD, RXD in mode RS232 or TTL (configurable)
Ed. 08.17 1‐19

RCSE 443 RMMC
1.4.2.4 Supported Protocols
Asynchronous protocol
Code Code transparent transmission
Data Security CRC–CCITT–Bytes for each telegram (SOFT–CRC)
telegram frames SEL Doc. MLSG–SE–DR–A/0,
S4000–SE–DS–AR/000–100, SN400–TEL–SPEC
Local Area Network (LAN) NETBIOS interface for the session–layer (Ethernet)
Wide Area Network (WAN) Internet IP, TCP/IP, PPP Implementation
1.4.2.5 Modem Replacement Unit LGM Extender 2
Level conversion CEPT–DEE of TTL to RS232 resp. RS422,

opto and electrically isolated for RS 422 connections
to distant equipment (e.g. CTU) without potential difference
Transmission baud rate Up to 38.4 kbit/s (for RS232)
Insulating property >= 0.5 kV
Output LGMx (x = 1..4, only at LGM4 all signals are available),
RS232 or RS422, Canon DB9, secondary overvoltage
protection
External power supply + 5 V (possible for optocoupler outputs), not used in RCSE
Operation ambient temperature 0 to 70 °C
relative humidity Max. 95 %
1‐20 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.4.2.6 Further Compliance Statements

The device RCSE443 complies with the requirements of EN 60950–1: 2006 + A11: 2009 + A1: 2010
+ A12: 2011.
This section furthers explains how all the components used for the assembly of the device RCSE 443
were chosen according to current engineering practices and that they comply with current safety
standards. In particular we state that:
1. Power supply model AP346.112 (P/N 8404582350 S/N 10990194) manufactured by Puls GmbH
is in compliance with standard requirements of amendment A2:2013 of EN 60950–1:2006.
2. Battery, model CR 1620 built by Panasonic mounted on board P/N 8404581751–A, has the
maximum operative temperature of 75 °C.
3. Plastic guides gray colored to hold in place the electronic boards, model 3686.137 are built from
Heitect engineering, have flammability class V–0 and conform to UL 94.
4. Data connectors on board P/N 8404581751, model Style C (8609 396 78 14755 ELF 14 26)
manufactured by FCI, comply with the standard UL 94 for class material V–0.
5. Plastic parts of LAN port, model NEF8FDP built by Neutrik AG, are in compliance with V–0 class
material according to UL 94 standard.
6. Connector used for data ports LGM–1, LGM–2, LGM–3, LGM–4, 1sA, 1sB, 2sA/422,
1+2a3/422, ZUA, IN/OUT, 1a2/PC1, 2a2/PC2, 2a1/CTU, 1a1/RSU, 1a3 and 2a3 are model DT
Series built by Foxconn having flammability class V–0 of thermoplastic material and maximum
operating temperature of 105 °C according to UL 94 standard.
7. Connector used with the data port OIO 1 is model Type Q built by ERNI Electronics GmbH.
8. The RCSE 443 equipment does not have data ports directly connected to telecommunication
network. It is only intended to be connected to external devices which have direct connection to
telecommunication network.
Ed. 08.17 1‐21

RCSE 443 RMMC
1.4.3 General Data INC

1.4.3.1 Housing and Power Supply
For standard applications, the INC is mounted directly as a front panel to the REU 19”–subrack. The
INC is supplied with 5 V by the REU power module.
1.4.3.2 Components
- INC panel with status indicators and select keys
- LED display driver
EQUIPMENT RC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MON 1 MON 2 TX 1 TX 2 OPERATION
AERIAL AERIAL ON ON
WARNING
STANDBY STANDBY WARNING WARNING
ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM DATA COM
FAULTY FAULTY FAULTY FAULTY

WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING
BYPASSED BYPASSED ON ANT ON ANT
NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL
CONTROL STATION
DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM
ENGAGED MAINS OFF
SIL
MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN
ENABLED ENV ALRM
COMMAND
ANT FTY
SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT EQUIP CHANGE REQUEST LAMP
SELECT SELECT
ON/OFF OVER RELEASE TEST
OTHER
WARN
Fig. 1‐9 INC panel of the RCSE with indications and buttons
1.4.3.3 Main Status Indication

For each subsystem the following indications are available (within the area EQUIPMENT–MAIN STA
TUS):
Text field, top red characters Four displays for characters, indicates station name or other;
if more than 4 characters are used indication is alternating
ALARM red Alarm:
– Subsystem shut–down
– Out–of–tolerance signal(s) while monitor in bypass
WARNING yellow Warning (Alert):
1 Transmitter(s) OFF
2 Equipm. initializing or (MLS: AZ/BAZ) reconfiguring
3 Primary Equipment shut–down by monitor
4 Limited Monitor Configuration (only one executive)
5 Local access (via local INC panel or connected PC/laptop)
6 Monitor Bypass (one or both)
7 MLS: Non–essential data shut–down
8 MLS: C–band sync switched off
9 Battery operation
1‐22 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
NORMAL green Normal Operation, i.e.

All transmitter and monitor equipments are switched on,
initialized and serviceable for the intended category of
operations (no Warning and no Alarm).
DATA COM red Data communication:

Data communication between subsystem and RCSE
is not available
MAINTEN yellow Continuous indication:

1. Maintenance Warning (BITE Warning)
2. Local access (local panel or attached terminal)
Flashing indication:
Indication of selected station
1.4.3.4 RCSE Status Indication and Control

The following RCSE status indications and controls are available in the area 'RC':
OPERATION green Normal operation
WARNING yellow REU BITE–Warning
DATA COM red Internal communication fault
SIL key Switches off the buzzer in case of alarm ('silence')
LAMP TEST key Test of all indication lamps (buzzer is switched on)
1.4.3.5 Detailed Subsystem Status Indication and Control
By selection of a defined subsystem the following indications and controls are available:
Monitor 1/2 status indication in area 'EQUIPMENT–DETAILED STATUS–MON1/2':
AERIAL green No Aerial Alarm
STANDBY green No Standby warning
FAULTY yellow Monitor Fault
BYPASSED yellow Monitor Bypass
Transmitter 1/2 status indication in area 'EQUIPMENT–DETAILED STATUS–TX1/2':

ON green TX on
WARNING yellow BITE Warning
FAULTY red Transmitter faulty (TX shut down)
ON ANT green TX connected to aerial
Switching commands in area 'EQUIPMENT–DETAILED STATUS–COMMAND':

EQUIP ON/OFF key Switching on/off station (after pushing REQUEST RELEASE
key), local mode is active, 'ENABLED' indication is switched
on
CHANGE OVER key Transmitter is changed over to other antenna (after actuating
REQUEST RELEASE key), local mode is active, monitors are
both in bypassed mode
Ed. 08.17 1‐23

RCSE 443 RMMC
Mode control (local/remote) in area 'EQUIPMENT–DETAILED STATUS–CONTROL':

ENGAGED yellow Remote mode, RCSE can only be controlled by PC
('COMMAND' keys not active)
ENABLED green Local mode, RCSE can be controlled using INC panel keys
('COMMAND' keys active)
REQUEST RELEASE key Change between local and remote mode (in local mode, the
'COMMAND' keys EQUIP ON/OFF and CHANGE OVER are
active)
Station status indication in area 'EQUIPMENT–DETAILED STATUS–STATION':

MAINS OFF yellow Mains power supply of station is switched off
ENV ALRM red Communication to selected station is faulty
ANT FTY red not used (always switched off)
OTHER WARN yellow Miscellaneous communication and protocol errors
NOTE: Some default behaviours of the status indicators (e.g. blinking, ...) can be configured
within the *.sit configuration file. The (optional) RMMC Configuration tool, which is availa
ble within the ADRACS user program, enables the operator to configure this behavior (see
3.2.5).
1.4.3.6 Control Functions on an Attached PC with ADRACS User Program
Standard operating software for the specific NAV–systems is used. The following list refers basically
to navaids (with implemented functions valid for MLS).
The attached terminal (PC/laptop) features following control functions:
– enter passwords for different security levels,
– select a defined subsystem to obtain subsystem data,
– display subsystem additional status indications,
– display Basic and Auxiliary Data Words (MLS),
– display transmitter data (frequency, ..),
– display executive monitor alarms and alerts,
– display executive monitor alarm and alert limits,
– display executive monitor numerical results,
– display maintenance data (BITE data, BITE results, .....),
– deny/grant local control mastership,
– input/change Basic and Auxiliary Data Words (MLS),
– input/change transmitter data (frequency, ..),
– input/change executive monitor alarm and alert limits (this capability is only available using
the highest security level 5),
– switch equipment ON/OFF,
– switch subsystems to standby equipment and redundant components (where applicable),
– switch the runway configuration (MLS: AZ/BAZ conversion, EL control),
– restart equipment,
– input dialing numbers for autodialing modems.
NOTE: More information on ADRACS control functions is given in the Technical Manual
ADRACS, ref. no. 83140 55324.
1‐24 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.4.4 External GPS Real Time Clock (optional)
A GPS clock receiver is provided in order to synchronise all time stamps throughout the RMMC sy
stem. All system status information can be identified by a definite time. The clock receiver controls
and puts the time back.
The GPS clock module is in service as soon as the RCSE is switched on and initialized. The data of
the GPS clock module is indicated using the PC user program ADRACS. A RPU panel window shows
the relevant GPS clock information data (location of clock, actual date and time, position coordi
nates).
1.4.5 Conformity and Licensing Approval

The RCSE 443 device has been developed to meet the requirements as stipulated in accordance with
the listed regulations or standards for what applicable to instrument landing systems:
S EMC Directive EN 55022 (2010) + EN 55024 (2010) EN 61000‐3‐2 (2006) + A1 (2009) +
A2 (2009) EN 61000‐3‐3 (2008)
S Low Voltage Directive EN 60950‐1:2006 + A11:2009 + A1:2010 + A12:2011 + A2:2013.
S Interoperability Regulation 552/2004/EC dated 31 March 2004
S 552/2004 Amending Regulations 1070/2009/EC dated 21 October 2009.
1.4.6 Safety Precautions

1.4.6.1 Work on the Equipment
In order to avoid risks to persons and consequential damage to subassemblies, the DC converter
has to be switched off prior to removing or inserting a subassembly or prior to removing a plug–in
connector.
1.4.6.2 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Subassemblies

When replacing subassemblies and plug–in cards containing electrostatically sensitive components,
special precautionary measures should be taken during removal, transport and installation in order
to prevent damage to the components. We refer to the customer documentation of the manufacturer.
Subassemblies which contain electrostatically sensitive components are
marked with this symbol.
If any of the maintenance personnel need to touch one of these subassemblies, they should place
both hands flat on a grounded conductive surface for a few seconds to eliminate static charges. The
subassembly can be touched – preferably at an insulator (board edge, lever mechanism, etc.) – as
soon as the potential has been equalized in this manner. It is advisable to avoid touching the contacts
of the plug–in connectors, the conductor paths and the components themselves. Some of the subas
semblies must be left in their antistatic packaging or plastic bags as long as possible. The special
procedures described below should be followed when subassemblies and plug–in boards are re
placed within the framework of repair and maintenance activities, due to the risk of damage to electro
statically sensitive components.
Ed. 08.17 1‐25

RCSE 443 RMMC
Removing a subassembly
1. Switch off the system before beginning the replacement procedure.
2. Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded rack with both hands.
3. Remove the subassembly and lay it down on a bench with a grounded conductive worktop.
4. Pack the subassembly in an antistatic plastic bag and send it off to the manufacturer for repair.
Installing a subassembly
1. Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded rack with both hands.
2. Remove the subassembly from the antistatic plastic bag.
3. Install the subassembly.
4. Switch on the system again.
1.4.6.3 Using Lithium Batteries
! CAUTION
This equipment contains a Lithium battery.

Danger of fire and explosion, if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.
– In case of fire, toxic gases and corrosive liquids may leak out. High fire load!
– Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 60 °C or incinerate any lithium
battery.
– Do not short–circuit the lithium battery.
– Do not solder directly on the lithium battery or in its near vicinity.
– When exchanging a lithium battery, only insert a lithium battery of the same type
according to manufacturer's recommendations and observe the correct polarity.
– Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
1.4.6.4 Observation of Safety Regulations

In addition to the above mentioned instructions for avoiding damage and injury, locally valid safety
regulations should always be observed.
1‐26 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.4.7 Explanation of Symbols on the RCSE 443 Chassis
Fig. 1‐10 Symbol for Earthing acc. to IEC 60417 (symbol no. 5017)
The above symbol stands for earthing. The RCSE chassis is permanently connected to the protective
conductor for line power via the secure screw connection. This protective conductor is on earth poten
tial.
The cable gland connection of the protective conductor must be mechanically strain–relieved. The
contact of the protective conductor is to be interrupted last when the cable is pulled out unintention
ally.
Fig. 1‐11 Symbol „Electrostatically Sensitive Device“ according to IEC 60417 (symbol no. 5134)
Subsystem comprising electrostatically sensitive components
~
Fig. 1‐12 Symbol for Alternate Current (AC)
ON, to indicate connection to AC mains

OFF, to indicate disconnection to AC mains
Fig. 1‐13 Symbols for „ON“ and „OFF“
Fig. 1‐14 Electrical ratings of the AC fuses located in the fuse holder of the power entry module
are identified by means of the marking plate
Ed. 08.17 1‐27

RCSE 443 RMMC
Fig. 1‐15 The RCSE 443 equipment is identified with the marking plate
1.4.8 RCSE 443 Label Safety Messages
This technical manual reports the following labels for safety messages.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED
BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS
Fig. 1‐16 Battery caution label
RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION
Location for equipment where both of the following apply:

access can only be gained by SERVICE PERSONS or by USERS
who have been instructed
Fig. 1‐17 Restricted access location label
1‐28 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description, Operation and Maintenance Equipment Description
1.5 SHORT DESCRIPTION

1.5.1 General Overview RCSE 443
Fig. 1‐18 shows the structure of a typical ILS remote control system. The central unit is the RCSE,
which is connected to the stations of the instrument landing system via dedicated lines. It includes
the REU and the INC indication panel as standard components. The REU is also used for the RMC
443 and also for the NAV‐LCU 443 in the VORTAC (or VOR/DME) shelter. Therefore, the design of the
REU is modular in order to be adaptable for the different applications. The block diagram below shows
the REU with the 7 available boards, which may be present in one of the existing seven PC–slots. The
maintenance functions are controlled by a PC system via the communication interface of the REU.
In addition, a connection to a maintenance center (RMC) is available via a dialing modem (or an ISDN
modem) and the PTT. The control and indication panel (INC) is black with inscriptions in white; the
recessed, transparent fields are half back–illuminated with red, yellow and green LED arrays. A sepa
rate text field with a four character red LCD display indicates the assigned stations or other text in the
top row for each system. The power supply is always +5 V and is obtained either from the REU or
from a separate DC converter.
Network interface (to LAN)
115/230 VAC (or alternatively 36 ... 72 VDC) USB connectors In/Out analog
J18/19 S12 OIO 1/2/3
REU AC/DC or 5V Processor Board

DC/DC +12 V ETX-CPU INC ADC OIO
Converter -12 V
PC Backpanel
Modem Backpanel
PC1 Serial
PC2 Interface Board
SIB modem bus
LED SIB
SW1
Modem 1) Modem 1) Modem 1)3) Modem 1)2)3) Modem NFK-29
5)
NFK-29
5)
LGM 1 LGM 2 LGM 3 LGM 4 ZUA/ZU1 1 2
RCSE
Connector Backpanel with Protectors
1a2 2a2 1sA 1sB LGM1 LGM2 LGM3 LGM4 ZUA NFK-1 NFK-2 2sA/ 2a1/ 1+2a3/ 1a1/ 1a3 2a3 IN/OUT
422 CTU 422 RSU
3) 2) 2) 4) 6) 5) 7) 7)
3) 5) 7)
4)
1) normally dialing modems

PTT LGM28.8 or LGM64K are used
PC1
PC2 (analog CTU 2) alternatively the ILS system
diagnosis or S0) can be connected at LGM4
using an LGM1200MD
modem
LLZ GP FFM MM OM RWY 3) MK20A stations are connected
via dedicated line modems
SELECT LGM9600H1 (half duplex mode)
RMC 4) alternatively RS422 connection
to CTU via LGM Extender 2 Unit
REU+INC at LGM4
Printer DME 5) alternatively Multiplexer RS232
for dedicated lines to ILS stations
GPS driven by 1a3connector
PC ILS Navaids System 2) 3) Clock 6) RSU with 'old' indication panel
RPU can be connected (see
section 1.2.2.1)
optional 7) optional GPS clock connected
via IN/OUT and 1a3 or 2a3
Fig. 1‐18 RCSE, block diagram (with one ILS Navaids system), example
Ed. 08.17 1–29

RCSE 443 RMMC
Equipment Description Description, Operation and Maintenance
1.5.2 Control Tower Unit CTU

The CTU is designed to be installed in the ATC control tower. It consists of a front panel, which indi
cates the status of each of eight NAV subsystems with one green, one red and one yellow LED. The
CTU can be enlarged by a RWY selector, to indicate the general status of two approach systems (run
ways) of ILS/MLS systems using four LED's for each direction. A key switch for selecting the desired
approach direction is available. It is possible to cascade additional CTU's. An external line termination
at the end of the cascaded units is not necessary. The CTU is described in chapter 7.
1.5.3 Maintenance Data Terminal / PC

NOTE: To avoid bringing in a computer virus, it is not allowed to run computer games generally
and to use software programs which are not authorized on the ADRACS PC or laptop.
It is recommended to test the computer and the CD‐ROM with a virus checker.
1.5.3.1 PC Requirements
The PC operating software (OS) for the different Navaid systems must be installed on a PC system.
The PC must meet the following requirements:
The navigation systems can be controlled via a maintenance data terminal (PC/laptop) in local mode,
for the purposes of the first setup procedure, maintenance and flight measurements. The PC control
software for the various NAV systems is called ADRACS and must be installed on the PC system. The
following PC system configuration is recommended:
S Control via mouse or comparable
S One serial interface connector (RS232), see NOTE
S A 32–Bit version of a Microsoft Windows OS (operating system):
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7 (also 64–Bit version)
NOTE: If the serial interface connector (RS232) is not available at the PC system, an adapter
cable has to be used to adapt the existing interface connector (e.g. USB) to the necessary
RS232 interface. A modification of the default COM port setting may be necessary in the
Adracs.ini file.
NOTE: The PC control software running on the Maintenance Data Terminal is ADRACS. For de
tailed information see the technical manual ADRACS (P/N 83140 55324).
1.5.3.2 Principle of Operation

The REU is the central unit of the Remote Control and Status Equipment (RCSE 443), thus responsi
ble for the functions controlling the data communication sequences and organization. It also handles
higher–level system functions. The functions performed by the REU can be subdivided into 3 groups:
- Internal functions (see also section 1.5.3.3)
– Setting interface parameters
– Interrupt control of interfaces
– Data backup
1–30 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
- External functions/Communication (see also section 1.5.3.4)

–Periodical request of status data (master)
–Control of maintenance data polling of a selected station with the PC program (slave)
–Forwarding control commands from the control panel to the station concerned (slave)
–Forwarding the status, history status and maintenance data to the PC and RMC (slave)
–Forwarding all status changes to the RMC (master)
–Driving the control and indication panels
–Handling of history memories
–Handling of access management
- System control (see also section 1.5.3.5)
– Runway selection (RWY 1/2 SWITCH)
– Runway selection enable (SWITCH CONTROL)
– Operation/programming with the PC (PC CONTROL)
– Dual–face interlock
– Forced switching off of the LLZ, GP, markers and FFM
1.5.3.3 Internal Functions

Whereas the interface parameters only have to be set once when the system is started up, selection
of the communication paths and data back up are recurring tasks. The respective communication
interface is selected via the interrupt–driven Serial Interface Board (SIB). The connections of the dial
ing modems are set up via the modem interface in accordance with V.25bis conventions.
All the data necessary for a correctly running RC system (i.e. the operating parameters, configuration
files) are saved within a file in 'drive d:' of the flash disk (on the ETX–CPU processor board). The actual
REU application program and the operating system (DR–DOS) are stored in 'drive c:' of the flash disk
(on the ETX–CPU processor board) in form of normal DR–DOS files. Both 'drives' of the flash disk
are managed by DR–DOS. When the system is started up, the application program and the configura
tion files are loaded by means of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file (AUTOmatic EXECution BATch).
During the initialization procedure, a checksum is figured out for the configuration file (CRC) and com
pared with the checksum stored in this file, to make sure that the file doesn't contain any errors and
hasn't been modified in an unauthorized way (since the configuration file can only be modified by au
thorized persons). Whenever the synchronous and asynchronous interfaces are used for communi
cation, either a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) checksum in form of two bytes is appended to the
telegrams, which ensures an extremely reliable data transmission, or at least a parity bit is set.
1.5.3.4 External Functions/Communication
Each time an attempt to communicate is made, the REU has to check whether the requested proce
dure is actually allowed according to the the control telegram. The command is not executed until
confirmation is received. Otherwise, an error message is generated. If a transmission error occurs,
an answer message is generally not generated.
1.5.3.4.1 Designation and Storage of Events

'Events' are all confirmed recognized condition changes of a subsystem, regardless of whether they
are reactions to errors, control commands or parameter changes which have been placed into effect
(not in the TEST mode), as well as communication errors. All events are provided with the identity,
the type of the affected device and a time label, and stored internally in a non–volatile memory. Data
retention is limited to 100 entries. The entries may be deleted completely or in part through operator
functions, or transmitted through the user interfaces to a maintenance data terminal.
Ed. 08.17 1–31

RCSE 443 RMMC
1.5.3.4.2 Error Handling

Communication errors are acknowledged with corresponding error codes. Each error recognized
during data checking leads to the discarding of the corresponding telegrams.
1.5.3.5 System Control
The REU manages the priorities of RWY SWITCH, SWITCH CONTROL and PC CONTROL. It also dis
tinguishes between two operating modes:
- With DUAL FACE INTERLOCK:
If the runway has ILSs on both sides, only one ILS system at a time is allowed to radiate a signal.
- Without DUAL FACE INTERLOCK:
Each ILS system can be switched on and off separately if there are two intersecting or parallel ap
proach directions.
The operating mode is preset in the configuration file. The REU also controls forced switching off of
the GP, the MARKER and the FFM, if the associated LLZ indicates an ALARM or a DATA COM ERROR
or is set to LOCAL MODE, or if the associated FFM indicates an ALARM (time–delayed, 1... 60 s). 'Au
tomatic disable on/off' is specified in the configuration file separately for GP, Marker and FFM.
1.5.4 Interfaces to Local Installations

1.5.4.1 NAVAIDS/ILS Systems
The NAV–LCU communicates with the NAV systems through the existing RS232C or RS422 interfaces
with the current unchanged protocols. The transmission rate is set as high as possible, depending
on the type and quality of the data link. Up to three NAV systems can be connected to a NAV–LCU
(e.g. CVOR or DVOR, TAC 453 or DME 415 and ELTA).
The individual NAV systems of a station are controlled through serial interfaces (via SIB), or as an op
tion through parallel interfaces (via OIO). Navaids 400 and S4000 systems C/DVOR, DME/TACAN
(DME 415/TAC 453 and ELTA; via IOM) are connected through serial interfaces, while the older device
generation (D)VOR–3000 as well as FSD–10/FTA–13 are linked in parallel as necessary.
For the incorporation of an ILS, the NAV–LCU is installed in form of the RCSE 443 in the engineering
area of the associated airport. With this variation, the individual ILS stations are linked by means of
dedicated lines.
Corresponding to the modems of the station, the ZU1 or ZUA signal converters or the LGM 28.8/64K
modems are employed for data transmission. Cyclical line polling is performed through the NFK29
low–frequency node, to which up to 6 dedicated lines may be connected. Alternatively a dedicated
line modem LGM1200MD (in party line operation mode) can be used instead of ZUx modem and star
distributor NFK. A second alternative is the usage of a Multiplexer RS232 board instead of a star dis
tributor NFK to build RS232 resp. RS422 dedicated line connections to ILS stations. The data trans
mission rate using ZU1 modem is 600 Bd, using LGM1200MD modem it is 600 or 1200 Bd and using
LGM28.8 modem it is 4800 Bd. To connect MK20A ILS equipment to the RCSE 443 the LGM9600H1
modem is used in half duplex mode.
NOTE: If a station is connected via radio link or GSM modem to the RCSE, the LGM Extender
Unit has to be used. The LGM Extender Unit is normally plugged into LGM4 slot of RCSE.
1–32 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.5.4.2 On–site Devices
Additional devices and in–house technical installations may be monitored through discrete line condi
tions. The OIO (Optocoupled–Input–Output) card with 24+8 discrete inputs/outputs is provided for
this purpose. This card is connected directly through the bus and controlled by its own driver pro
gram.
The configuration of the OIO – i.e. the assignment of specific inputs to specific devices as well as the
definition of the allocated signals – is carried out by the local maintenance terminal. The plug–in unit
is designed for signals of 5 V, while other versions for 12 V or 24 V are also optionally available.
1.5.4.3 ADRACS Interface to Local PC (Laptop)
The functions for settings and maintenance are executed by a local control PC (laptop). In order to
simplify the operations, communications may take place through the NAV–LCU and not directly at
the navigation device (no plug changing on the V.24/RS232C interface). The laptop used for local
ADRACS operation is connected through an RS232C serial interface with a configurable baud rate.
The concept of control and message telegram transmission is also applied here. In case of a failure,
i.e. the queried device does not respond after a configurable repetition, a message is displayed to
the user. The telegram structure corresponds to an asynchronous protocol which is specifically
adapted to the remote controls of the navigation system.
The telegram is composed of a number of bytes (1 byte = 8 bits). Each byte is limited by a start bit
and a stop bit. A maximum interval of 1 ms each occurs between the data blocks of 10 bits which have
been generated. By setting time loops at the beginning of the transmission, it is thus possible to rec
ognize improper telegram lengths. Data security is performed by a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).
The ADRACS user program is described in more detail in the Technical Manual ADRACS, ref. no.
83140 55324.
1.5.4.4 Interface for Remote Data Transmission

The (dial) modem for remote data transmission is connected via a serial, asynchronous interface.
1.5.5 Interface to LAN Network

The base for network interfacing is the processor board ETX–CPU with Ethernet controller/connector.
The network interface feature via TCP/IP allows to transfer the information of the RCSE containing the
status of all connected systems including the REU. The configuration of the network link feature is
implemented in the specific *.sit file of the RCSE installation.
The performance of the RCSE is enlarged by the availability of a network interface, which allows ac
cess to the REU via Ethernet. The following REU information is accessible:
- Status of the REU
- Status of the stations connected to the REU
- Transfer of status changes to several hosts (IP addresses)
- Definition of a gateway (IP address) for routing to other subnet
- Definition of the IP address of a NTP–server in order to request time status every 10 minutes. Inter
nal time of REU is corrected correspondingly (accuracy : ±5 s).
- All IP addresses are defined in the associated *.sit file
Ed. 08.17 1–33

RCSE 443 RMMC
1.5.6 Interface to GPS Clock Module

An external GPS real–time clock can be connected optionally to the RCSE, in order to synchronise
all time stamps throughout the RMMC system. All system status information can be identified by a
definite time. The clock receiver controls and puts the time back.
The GPS clock module is fed by the RCSE +5 V output pin of the IN/OUT connector, one of the serial
connectors 1a3 or 2a3 has to be used to transfer the GPS clock information data (i.e. actual date and
time, position coordinates).
The GPS clock information data is indicated using the PC User Program ADRACS. The ADRACS RPU
panel shows the relevant GPS clock information data.
NOTE: For more information on installation and operation of the GPS clock module see sections
2.3.5 and 3.2.9.
1–34 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.6 RCSE SOFTWARE
The central feature of the RCSE/REU is an industrial PC system which uses DR–DOS (Version 7.03).
All the data required to run the remote control system correctly (operating parameters) are saved in
a file in the flash disk on the processor board.
The software is written in programming language ADA. The software and the operating system are
stored in the drive c: of the flash disk as normal DR–DOS files. The RCSE software is subdivided into
the following functions:
- Initialization
- System control
- Communication routines
- Communication distributor/history memories/system control
- Subsystem data input
- System security
1.6.1 Initialization
When the system is started up, the configuration files (*.sit, *.oio, *.ptt) are loaded to the drive d: of
the flash disk (the user has access to the drive d: via ADRACS command 'Copy PC file to RAM') and
verified with a CRC checksum. The communication channels are assigned according to the system
configuration and the interrupts for interface control are defined.
After that the sequence table for the connected stations is initialized (baud rate, channel number, tele
gram type, etc.), the switched–line modems are installed and the telephone numbers are pro
grammed. All the flags, peripheral chips, HW and SW counters, multiplexers, tables, etc. are set to
a defined initial state, which is also partly dependent on the contents of the configuration file. Finally,
the password is installed and communication is started.
1.6.2 System Control
The REU system incorporates a maintenance mode, which is controlled via a maintenance data termi
nal (PC) or via an RMC. The RCSE software controls certain system functions by setting/resetting soft
ware flags resulting from error detection or status changes of hardware switches or keys on the CTU
or on the INC. The states of the flags are indicated on the CTU respectively INC panels.
- Data communication error
The software flag DATA COM ERROR of a station is set in the REU software if an attempt to exchange
telegrams between the REU and the desired (selected) station fails x times in a row. The number 'x'
can be defined in the configuration file for each station.
The DATA COM ERROR flag is reset after each successful telegram exchange.
- Runway selection
The selection of the active runway system is normally done via the CTU. The hardware switches
SW1/SW2 on the rear side of the CTU board enable or disable the selection of runway 1 or runway
2, which is done via the key switch on the front side of the RunWaY Select panel of the CTU. A telegram
is sent to the REU every 2 seconds containing the status of the key switch and the position of the
SW1/SW2 hardware switches. The REU sets the flag RWY–1/2–SWITCH, if the selection of the runway
is enabled (on CTU). For more information concerning the CTU see chapter 7.
Ed. 08.17 1–35

RCSE 443 RMMC
If the REU doesn't receive any Runway Select telegram from the CTU for more than 10 seconds, the
PC user gets the permission to manipulate the RWY–1/2–SWITCH flag by actuating the 'switch' but
ton within the main status window of the ADRACS user program (see Technical Manual ADRACS,
section 2.3.1). This only applies until another valid telegram is received from the CTU. Otherwise, the
PC is not allowed to alter the RWY–1/2–SWITCH flag.
- INC control of stations (switch control)

The INC control of a station is only possible, if the corresponding runway is not active, i.e. the flag
RWY–1/2–SWITCH flag is set to 0. The PC control of the INC panel controlled station is not allowed,
only the PC control of other stations of the runway is possible.
- PC control of stations
Sending telegrams to a station from PC (using the ADRACS user program) is only allowed if the corre
sponding runway is not active and the selected station is not controlled by the INC panel. To send
commands to the station (e.g. transmitter on/off), the PC user has to be logged in with a password
level > 2. If the PC control is active, the flag PC CONTROL is set.
- Dual–face interlock
The REU manages two different operating modes for runway systems having ILS systems on both
sides. This mode is preset in the configuration file. The two modes are:
– With DUAL FACE INTERLOCK:
Only one of the ILS systems at a time is allowed to radiate a signal.
– Without DUAL FACE INTERLOCK:
Each ILS system can be switched on/off separately if there are two intersecting or parallel
approach directions.
- Automatic disabling of stations (Forced Shutdown)
For ILS or MLS systems it is sometimes necessary to do forced switching off of associated stations,
if a 'Main' station is in ALARM state. For the stations GP, LLZ and Marker it is possible to define two
'Main' stations in the configuration file. An 'ON'– and 'OFF'–time for each 'Main' station has to be con
figured in the file, that defines the switching on and off delays between alarm occurrence/disappear
ance and the forced switching off/on of the associated stations. Additionally, the consideration of a
DATA_COM_ERROR in context with forced switching off can be defined in the configuration file (flag
ON–/OFF–CONTROL).
1.6.3 Communication Routines

The precondition for the establishment of a communications link is that there are identical protocols
on all terminal systems. Open communication between all user stations is then possible technically.
However, this may be restricted at any time, for organizational purposes, for instance. A switched line
connection with an analog (or digital) terminal, which also allows telephone operations, exists as a
network system connection for cost–effective data communication through the public telecommu
nications network (PTT).
Communication with the terminal equipment is implemented using different types of telegram. The
telegrams are converted by special communication routines. The data answers are checked in addi
tion, and either forwarded to the communication distributor or ignored if applicable with an error mes
sage. A special communication routine is used to control the dialing modem, so that switched line
connections can be set up automatically. Optionally communication with an existing LAN network
using TCP/IP is possible using the Network Interface Link of the processor board.
1–36 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
1.6.3.1 Communication Distributor/History Memory

The communication distributor RCSE can be imagined as a kind of data 'turntable' for the different
telegram types between the orderers of the requested tasks. It receives data, checks it and redistrib
utes it. The distributor controls the chronological sequence of all communication functions. The
RCSE only performs the role of the master when the MAIN STATUS is requested from the stations
and when the general status is signaled to the RMC as a result of a status change. All other serial
interfaces are polled in response to a request. The MAIN STATUS of stations directly connected is
requested by means of a polling mechanism.
Communication with the stations is periodic and controlled by sequence tables listing all the confi
gured stations. The structure of the tables differs according to the requirements of the other communi
cation channels. Due to the fact that no stations not belonging to the system are configured, the se
quence tables and the polling cycles are both shortened. If there are two low–frequency nodes, the
stations are split between two sequence tables and two of them are addressed simultaneously. The
length of the polling cycles is thus halved.
The control program monitors the time frame of the individual telegram sequences. If an answer mes
sage is not received from the polled station within the specified time frame, the polling continues with
the next station in the table. After 'n' unsuccessful attempts (value 'n' see configuration file),
DATA_COM_ERROR is set for the station concerned, and the history memory is updated due to the
change in the MAIN STATUS. The status information which is received is checked for changes stored
(if need be) in the history memory.
Since the devices at the interfaces are polled with different protocols, it is necessary to preprocess
the data at the interface uniformly for the system. It is also possible to incorporate new protocols
non–reactively into the existing REU software at later date because of this separation.
The functions at the station are realized on the one side by the application software of the REU and,
on the other side, by the software in the maintenance PC. As is the case with remote diagnosis, the
PC assumes the interface function to the maintenance engineer, while the REU establishes commu
nications to the individual devices. As a result of the multiple serial interfaces, a quasi multitasking
structure of the REU software is necessary. Communications for the serial interfaces to the individual
devices takes place through the V.24/RS232C or RS422 interfaces.
The application is processed in specific structures. In the 'Accept' section, the tasks are accepted
by the task requester and queued for processing. Execution is asynchronous to the task request. In
the 'Operation Controls' section, the tasks are, according to the current status of the subsystem, dis
carded or additionally detailed for execution. In the 'Execution' section the tasks are executed by poll
ing other devices, for example, or by assigning other Ada subsystems.
1.6.3.2 Subsystem Data Input

The programming of site specific data is required for all navaids equipment with microprocessor–con
trolled signal processing for transmitter signal generation, built–in testing and monitoring. The input/
change of variable system parameters for the transmitter and for the monitor is executed by digital
data entry. The data input via the keyboard of a maintenance data terminal (PC/laptop) in a menu tech
nique is a comfortable method to enter data to the equipment.
For integrity reasons, the data entry (input/change) is only possible in the maintenance mode (moni
tor bypass on) and besides, corresponding password procedures are implemented. In addition to
local control, executive monitor alarm and alert limits can be changed remotely by means of an atta
ched terminal (beside the input/change of basic and auxiliary data words). The capability of remote
data input of auxiliary data words is absolutely necessary. The remote change of monitor alarm limits
can ease the flight test procedure.
Ed. 08.17 1–37

RCSE 443 RMMC
Due to the fact that at the remote site it should be possible to change parameters which are critical
to safety, the monitor–bypass mode (maintenance mode) is not identical to the local/remote control
switching function on the Local/Remote Communication Interface (LRCI), i.e. the following switching
functions are independent:
- Remote control/local control
- Test mode (MLS only) and
- Monitor–bypass mode (maintenance mode)
For Navaids 400 and S4000 systems only the monitor–bypass mode is used. For MLS and DME/P
the following definitions are to be applied:
– Monitor–bypass mode defines that this specific monitor is not executive (no switch–over–shut
down initiation, even if the signal is out–of–tolerance).
– Maintenance mode defines that the equipment to be monitored is under control of the
maintenance personnel (no monitor executive function to this equipment).
1.6.3.3 Communication with Navaids 400 and SYSTEM 4000 Stations
The REU is the controlling, active unit for this type of communication. The stations receive control
messages in a fixed polling cycle and respond with answer messages; they cannot issue an answer
message without first receiving a control message (MASTER/SLAVE principle). A transmission cycle
thus always consists of a control message and an answer message.
The configured stations are not accessed democratically, i.e. all the primary stations LLZ–1, GP–1,
LLZ–2 and GP–2, but only one of the other stations, are addressed during each polling cycle. The
time until the secondary stations are updated is correspondingly longer. It is also generally possible
to communicate with two ILS stations on one channel, or with one or more VOR systems.
If the remote station is a NAV–LCU, all the instruments connected to it can be addressed individually.
The channel assignment is freely selectable. During normal operation, only the MAIN STATUS is re
quested from all stations.
If a station is selected with the control unit however (INC or PC), the system status data and the main
tenance data (PC CONTROL) are requested from this station as well. The refresh rate of all the system
data is reduced as a result.
1.6.3.4 Communication via Open Interfaces
Open interfaces are ones which can be used for maintenance operation, e.g. the PC interfaces and
the RMC connection. It is not possible to begin maintenance operation (i.e. control operations) via
different interfaces at the same time, but simultaneous status indication is possible. This is governed
by access levels 1...5. Operation at levels 3 to 5 (i.e. control of the system is allowed) is only possible
if no other sessions are in progress simultaneously. In order to protect the RCMS system against un
authorized access, the REU demands a modifiable 6–character password, which is transmitted to
gether with the number of the access level (password level).
The REU operates in slave mode with this type of communication, i.e. no telegrams are issued without
a prior request. The PC control program (ADRACS) requests the system status or the maintenance
1–38 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
data (PC CONTROL) of a particular station via the PC or RMC interface. This data is then forwarded
by the REU to the station, if necessary (control message). The answer data which are returned by the
station is forwarded to the PC. The REU is informed about the start of each PC communication ses
sion by means of the LOGIN command (password), and about the end of a session by the LOGOUT
command. The LOGIN procedure does not allow more than three input attempts.
If three unsuccessful attempts are made, all further inputs are blocked for 3 minutes. This interval is
incremented by 1 minute with each additional, unsuccessful attempt, and finally increased to 60 min
utes after the 10th failed attempt. For a new site, where user and passwords have not yet been ar
ranged, user 1 is free for the first access to the system (all other users are blocked).
1.6.3.5 History Memories
All system changes (RWY 1/2) and all changes in the status of a station which are not caused by RWY
CONTROL or SWITCH CONTROL are stored in a history memory in the REU. This stack is physically
located in the 'RAM side' of the flash disk on processor board. When the REU is initialized, an initial
event (history event) is stored for each approach direction and subsystem. Each history memory can
be erased by the control program for a particular date. A status change is stored after the new MAIN
STATUS has remained unchanged for at least one minute. If the status changes constantly, only one
change per day is recorded.
1.6.3.6 Control of Indications
The indications are derived continuously from the MAIN STATUS telegrams, and output to the re
questing point when the general status is polled.
1.6.4 System Security

The Maintenance Data Terminal uses passwords and user identifiers to prevent from unauthorized
access to the system. This is implemented in all the maintenance menus active for the different sub
systems (e.g. ADRACS for Navaids 400 systems) for five levels of security. Not having an open system
communication concept but only a point–to–point connection, access to the maintenance data termi
nal is possible only at especially assigned locations. These areas are usually only accessible by au
thorized personnel.
In addition to the maintenance data terminal security with the above passwords, the start of
data–transmission at the RMC's for starting communication on switched public telephone lines is se
cured by a variable password with '6 characters' including defined login sequences. To increase the
system security, the data communication with control and message telegrams for switched public
telephone lines to a subsystem can only start after establishing a switched line connection with the
subsystem site. This ensures that authorized telephone numbers are allowed communication ac
cesses to a subsystem.
For the autodialing procedure caused by a change of subsystem status, this process of communicat
ing is straight forward. Having established the connection, the RMC sends control telegrams and the
subsystem replies with the message telegrams.
In case of a desired communications link from an RMC, the RMC dials the number of the subsystem
and gives the message to call the RMC back. Now the subsystem reorganizes the communication
Ed. 08.17 1–39

RCSE 443 RMMC
with the configured fixed programmed telephone number of the defined RMC. With this procedure
access by other than authorized personnel is avoided.
The security of the data transmission itself is ensured by the master/slave concept employed with its
defined control and message telegrams within fixed time frames. Each telegram is terminated by a
two byte CRC. The data communication is monitored and displayed on the INC.
1.6.5 Ethernet– and USB–Interface (LAN)
Ethernet interface (LAN)

The ETX–CPU processor board is equipped with an optional ethernet controller which allows the REU
to be linked up to a thin–wire ethernet network (LAN) via the interface 10/100 Base–T twisted pair,
RJ45. The voltage (+5 V) necessary for operation is supplied from the PCI–bus via the VG connector.
The RJ45 interface is situated on the ETX–CPU processor board and is also provided on the RCSE
back panel (connector in the LAN opening) by using a socket–to–socket adapter. The used network
connector type there is RJ45 female. See also section 2.3.4.
USB interfaces (inactive)
The standard PC host controller V1.0 is connected to X14/X51. However, the two USB interfaces are
not supported by the software in this application.
1–40 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Installation
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SETUP
2.1 GENERAL
This chapter describes the installation and initial setup procedures for the RCMS 443. The equipment
and system configurations are dependent on the local situation and may vary accordingly (RCSE,
CTU, PC, RMC). The RCMS hardware configuration is adapted to the site by the configuration files
within the user program.
2.2 INSTALLATION
2.2.1 General
The installation procedures for the various components of RCMS 443 are dependent on the local
situation. A default configuration is assumed, consisting of an RCSE 443, a CTU and RWY– SELECT,
a PC with a printer and an RMC‐R/RMC–C (see Fig. 2‐7). The RCSE installation with PC is described
within this section, the CTU installation in section 7.4.
2.2.2 Cablings and Power Connections

Cabling for RCSE/PC/RMC:
S Set the AC and DC power switch on the rear of the subracks to lower position resp. to 'OFF'
S Connect a ground or frame cable
S Connect the power supply (either AC or DC, depending on the configuration) see Fig. 2‐1
S Connect the external equipment (see Fig. 2‐7)
ATTENTION
If a DC power supply is used, take care to connect it with the correct polarity. Make sure
the correct mains voltage is set if an AC supply is used (REU: 115 V or 230 V).
VAC 115/230 V 2AT Mains switch AC VAC 115/230 V 2AT
NFK-1 NFK-1
Mains fuse
6.3AT AC, F2H/250V 6.3AT
VDC VDC
36-72 V 36-72 V
+- +-
NFK-2 NFK-2
DC/DC DC/DC
ON ON
OFF OFF
DC power switch
+ - REU-subrack: REU-subrack:
36 ... 72 V
~
AC-Power 115/230 V (selectable)
DC-Power
Supply Supply
Equipped with DC/DC-converter Equipped with AC/DC-converter
Fig. 2‐1 RCSE system cabling, power supply
Ed. 08.17 2–1

RCSE 443 RMMC
Installation Description and Operation
AC fuse
F2H/250 V
Mains power input

115/230 VAC
2AT
Only use an AC power

fuse cord with a grounded,
6.3AT three–pronged female
connector according to
IEC 60320–C13,
observe the safety
message in section
2.2.2.1.
+ - DC switch
36‐72 VDC
inputs
Fig. 2‐2 DC power inputs, fuse holder, ground
side view
12 V DC -12 V +12 V
output terminals
top view
-12 V +12 V
fuse fuse
1AT 1AT
Fig. 2‐3 12 VDC power output terminals, fuses, ground terminals
2–2 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2.2.2.1 AC Mains Cable with Power Cord Specific to the Region or Country
ATTENTION
The RCSE must have an AC power cord with a grounded, three–pronged female connec
tor according to IEC 60320–C13. Only then the RCSE may be connected to the AC mains
supply.
Alternatively, the RCSE must have a C14 plug with an IEC power connector on the other end of the
cable. The IEC power connector/sockets must be three–pronged, having outer conductor, neutral
conductor, and protection conductor.
Only use approved three–conductor power cords specific to the region or country intended for in
stallation.
2.2.3 Connection of ILS or (D)VOR Stations
Connection of ILS stations via LGM1200MD party line modems, two variants:
a) star configuration (see Fig. 2‐4)

b) ring configuration (see Fig. 2‐5)
Both variants use R/C–line terminations (600 ohms II 47 nF).
*) 600 ohms II 47 nF
RCSE 443
**) replaces ZU modem and
star distributor NFK29
REU INC
LGM1200MD **)
*)
dedicated lines 2-wire
*) *) *) *)
LGM1200MD LGM1200MD LGM1200MD LGM1200MD
LLZ FFM Marker GP
Fig. 2‐4 ILS stations connected via party line modems LGM1200MD, star configuration
Ed. 08.17 2–3

RCSE 443 RMMC
RCSE 443 *) 600 ohms II 47 nF

**) replaces ZU modem and
REU INC star distributor NFK29
LGM1200MD **)
*)
dedicated lines 2-wire
*)
LGM1200MD LGM1200MD LGM1200MD LGM1200MD

LLZ FFM Marker GP
Fig. 2‐5 ILS stations connected via party line modems LGM1200MD, ring configuration
Connection of (D)VOR S4000 stations
Replace the cable to MB–E1/J11 and MB–E2/J9 with AF cable 24009 28099 and connect SubD
connector to socket 2a3 of RCSE. If necessary, use the 97240 28168 extension cable.
(D)VOR 4000
AF Extension AF Cable
97240 28168 24009 28099
MB-E1 J11
J9
MB-E2
rear side
Fig. 2‐6 (D)VOR S4000 station connected to RCSE (example)
NOTE: The cable connection between the RCSE and an optional GPS real–time clock module
is described in section 2.3.5.
2–4 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2 (28.8)
LGM1
4 (64K)
RMC-C 2 (28.8)
LGM1
4 (64K)
RMC-R
PTT
Note:
2 (28.8)
4 (64K)
The overall length of a RS422 connection
LGM4
line should be 1 km !
2a3
DVOR NAV-LCU
S4000 RS422 443 5) The overall length of a RS232 connection
line should be 15 m !
Terminal GPS clock 2 (28.8) 2 (28.8)

(D)VOR 4) module 4 (64K) 4 (64K)
RS232 7)
Printer
2a3 1a3 IN/OUT LGM1 LGM2
PC2
COM1
ZUx 2a2
COM1
LPT1
PC1
1a2
RS232 diagnosis
RS232
RCSE 443
1a1
2a1
RS422
J1 CTU+RWY J2
2)
6)
S12 OIO2 OIO1 LGM31) LGM41) 2) RS422
Dedicated
Lines J1 CTU+RWY J2
2-wire
16 IN
24 IN
2 2
16 OUT
8 OUT
Analog Control Control Navaids 400 3)

Signals Signals Signals Landing System DME/TAC
1) LGM3/4 is equipped with LGM9600H1 3) Alternatively to ZU/NFK dedicated lines 5) Information to NAV–LCU 443 is given
modem (half duplex, V.23) to connect the Navaids 400 landing system can be in chapter 6 of this technical manual.
an MK20A ILS system to the RCSE. connected via LGM4 using a modem 6) Optionally used as OIO3 connector
LGM1200MD (party line)
2) CTU is connected via LGM4 if LGM 7) Used for GPS clock power supply
Extended 2 Unit is used to prevent
potential difference in case of long 4) (D)VOR S4000 connection, see Fig. 2‐6
lines. optional
Fig. 2‐7 RCSE 443 system cabling, connections of peripheral equipment, example
Ed. 08.17 2–5

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.2.4 RCSE/REU, Pin Assignment of Interface Connectors
LGM1 1sA 1a2/PC1

VAC 115/230 V 2AT 1) OIO 1 OIO 2 S12 2)
NFK-1 LGM2 1sB 2a2/PC2
6.3.AT
VDC LGM3 2sA/422 2a1/CTU
36-72 V
+- 1AT
LGM4 1+2a3/422 1a1/RSU 1AT -12V +12V
NFK-2
ZUA 1a3
DC/DC
ON IN/OUT 2a3
1)
OFF
1) connector not used

2) optionally OIO3
Fig. 2‐8 RCSE/REU back panel, connectors
2.2.4.1 SubD 25 Pin Connectors NFK–1, NFK–2 (male)
NFK–1 / NFK–2 slot equipped with NFK29–1 board (used for connections via modem):
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT

1 F1 IN–A (2–wire Rx/Tx; 4–wire Rx) 13 Not connected
2 F1 IN–B (2–wire Rx/Tx; 4–wire Rx) 14 F1 OUT–A (4–wire Tx)
3 F2 IN–A (2–wire Rx/Tx; 4–wire Rx) 15 F1 OUT–B (4–wire Tx)
25 F6 OUT–B (4–wire Tx)
2–6 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
NFK1 / NFK–2 slot equipped with multiplexer RS232 board (used for RS232/RS422 connection):
1 RS232 RXD Ch1 / RS422 +RXD Ch1 13 Not connected
2 not used / RS422 –RXD Ch1 14 RS232 TXD Ch1 / RS422 +TXD Ch1
3 RS232 RXD Ch2 / RS422 +RXD Ch2 15 RS232 GND Ch1 / RS422 –TXD Ch1
25 RS232 GND Ch6 / RS422 –TXD Ch6
2.2.4.2 SubD 9 Pin Connectors (male)
LGM1 used for LGM28.8 / LGM64K / LGM1200MD / LGM9600H1

1 La / SX2– (Tx–) 6 E / not connected
2 Lb / SX1+ (Tx+) 7 not connected
3 a2 / SR1– (Rx–) 8 not connected
4 b2 / SR2+ (Rx+) 9 not connected
5 G / not connected

5 G / not connected

5 G / not connected

5 G / not connected
Ed. 08.17 2–7

RCSE 443 RMMC
LGM Extender 2 Unit used at one of LGM1..4 slots for external RS232 / RS422 connections,
e.g. to CTU in other buildings
1 DCD / –TXD 6 DSR / –RTS
2 RXD / +TXD 7 RTS / +RTS
3 TXD / –RXD 8 CTS / –CTS
4 DTR / +RXD 9 RI / +CTS
5 Gnd
1sA used for external RS232 connections

1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RxD 7 RTS
3 TxD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 Gnd
1sB used for external RS232 connections

1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RxD 7 RTS
3 TxD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 Gnd
2sA/422 used for external RS422 connections

1 –TxD 6 –RxD
2 +TxD 7 +RxD
3 not connected 8 not connected
5 Gnd
1+2a3/422 used for external RS422 connections

1 –TxD (1a3) 6 –TxD (2a3)
2 +TxD (1a3) 7 + TxD (2a3)
3 –RxD (1a3) 8 –RxD (2a3)
4 +RxD (1a3) 9 +RxD (2a3)
5 Gnd
ZUA used for ZUA29

1ZUA A12 (2–wire Rx/Tx; 4–wire Tx ) 6 B22 (2–wire Rx/Tx; 4–wire Tx)
line amplifier
used as
2ZUA B12 (2–wire Rx/Tx; 4–wire Tx) 7 A21 (4–wire Rx)

used as ZU
3ZU1 A11 (4–wire Rx) 8 B21 (4–wire Rx)

4ZU1 B11 (4–wire Rx) 9 not used
5 A22 (2–wire Rx/Tx; 4–wire Tx)
2–8 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
IN/OUT used as TTL Auxiliary I/O (optionally for GPS clock power supply)
1 AUX IN 1 6 AUX IN 6
3 AUX IN 3 8 AUX OUT 1
4 AUX IN 4 9 +5 V
5 AUX IN 5
1a2/PC1 used for PC1 (maintenance data terminal, PC)

1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RxD 7 RTS
3 TxD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 Gnd
2a2/PC2 used for PC2 (diagnosis terminal only, defined by internal software)
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RxD 7 RTS
3 TxD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 Gnd
2a1/CTU used for CTU (RS422 connection)

1 –TxD 6 –RxD
2 +TxD 7 +RxD
5 Gnd
1a1/RSU used for 'old' RSU (RS422 connection)

1 –TxD 6 –RxD
2 +TxD 7 +RxD
5 Gnd
1a3 used for external RS232 connections (optionally for GPS clock data input)
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RxD 7 RTS
3 TxD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 Gnd
2a3 used for external RS232 connections (optionally for GPS clock data input)
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RxD 7 RTS
3 TxD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 Gnd
Ed. 08.17 2–9

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.2.4.3 64 Pin Connectors OIO 1, OIO 2, OIO 3 and S12

These connectors are optionally equipped together with optional OIO boards or an ADC board.
OIO 1, OIO 2 and OIO 3, example: assignment for variant 24 inputs / 8 outputs*)
PIN Assignment PIN Assignment OIO 1 OIO 2 S12 (OIO3)
1 OUT 17 IN 32
2 OUT 18 IN
3 OUT 19 IN
4 OUT 20 IN
5 OUT 21 IN
6 OUT 22 IN
7 OUT 23 IN
8 OUT 24 IN
1
9 IN 25 IN c a
10 IN 26 IN *)
11 IN 27 IN *) Polarity of Input–pins: row a positive, row c negative

12 IN 28 IN Polarity of Output–pins: row a negative, row c positive
13 IN 29 IN
14 IN 30 IN
15 IN 31 IN
16 IN 32 IN
Other variants of OIO PIN layouts exist: Definition of inputs and outputs
TYPE PIN layout
Vcc Vcc
32 inputs 1..32 IN
R**
32 outputs 1..32 OUT a c
16 inputs / 16 outputs 1..8 IN IN OUT

9..16 OUT c a
17..24 IN log. 0= max. 1 mA
log. 1= min. 10 mA max. 35 V/150 mA
25..32 OUT
** depends on input voltage
8 inputs / 24 outputs 1..8 IN Uin R**
9..32 OUT 5V 560
12 V 1k
8 outputs / 24 inputs 1..8 OUT 15 V 1,5 k
9..32 IN 24 V 2,2 k
Definition of inputs and outputs

INPUT OUTPUT
+5V SST 113

a Max. 35 V
U in 5 V ... 25 V Max. collector current: 80 mA
11 k 220 3 mA Strom- P max: 150 mW
6 1 regeldiode 1 4
c
22 k 5 1k 680
100 nF 2 2
3
4 3 c a
GND LTV-702V LTV-815
Fig. 2‐9 Definition of inputs and outputs
2–10 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
S12 is used for ADC or for other special applications, like the multi‐IRQ function to provide the four
COM ports (COM1...4) of the ETX‐CPU processor board at the S12 (OIO3) connector.
COM-Pin COM1 to OIO3-Pin COM2 to OIO3-Pin COM3 to OIO3-Pin COM4 to OIO3-Pin

1 (DCD) 32a 27a 22a 17a
2 (DSR) 32c 27c 22c 17c
3 (RxD) 31a 26a 21a 16a
4 (RTS) 31c 26c 21c 16c
5 (TxD) 30a 25a 20a 15a
6 (CTS) 30c 25c 20c 15c
7 (DTR) 29a 24a 19a 14a
8 (RI) 29c 24c 19c 14c
9 (GND) 28a 23a 18a 13a
Ed. 08.17 2–11

RCSE 443 RMMC
2–12 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2.3 INITIAL HARDWARE SETTINGS

2.3.1 General Prerequisites
This chapter describes the prerequisites for first setup of the equipment and gives an overview of the
hardware settings. It presumes that the equipment has been factory‐aligned and tested.
2.3.2 Hardware Settings

All relevant parameters are normally set before factory acceptance has taken place. These parame
ters are checked during the acceptance procedure. Fig. 2‐10 shows connector back panels of differ
ent hardware configurations, which may vary individually for each installation.
2.3.2.1 REU, Connector Back Panel
Configuration of Connector Back Panel (CBP)

Standard Modem Assignment State of delivery setting:
1 A 1‐2 (a‐h) LGM‐3 operated via 2a3 1
A 2 A 2
3 A 2-3 (a-h) LGM-3 operated via 2sA 3
1 B 1-2 (a-h) LGM-2 operated via 2a3 1
B 2 B 2
3 B 2-3 (a-h) LGM-2 operated via 1sB 3
1 C 1-2 (a-h) LGM-1 operated via 1a3 1
C 2
C 2
3 C 2-3 (a-h) LGM-1 operated via 1sA 3
1 1
D 1-2 (a-d) ZU-Modem operated via 1a3
D 2
D 2
3 D 2-3 (a-d) ZU-Modem operated via 2a3 3
1 1
E 2 E 2
a b c d e f g h i a b c d e f g h i
without ZU/NFK not used

Default setting for specific configurations:
Í
LGM2 distributed via NFK2*
1 = jumper is set
Í
A 2
3
= jumper must not be set, if 5th LGM modem is operated via 2a3
ÍÍ
1
B 2
3
ÍÍ
Í
1
C 2
3 * LGM2 in dedicated line mode and distribution via NFK2 channel 6,
ÍÍ
1 which converts LGM output signal from 2 to 4-wire operation with
D 2
3 special B64/B63 setting (see section 2.3.2.4). Normally, the ZU-modem
ÍÍ
1 is distributed via NFK1/2 (see below).
E 2
a b c d e f g h i
ZU-Modem distributed ZU-Modem distributed ZU-Modem distributed

via NFK-1 via NFK-2 via NFK-1 and NFK-2
1 1 1
A 2 A 2 A 2
3 3 3
1 1 1
B 2 B 2 B 2
3 3 3
1 1 1
C 2 C 2 C 2
3
3 3
1 1 1
D 2 D 2 D 2
3
3 3
1 1 1
E 2 E 2 E 2
a b c d e f g h i a b c d e f g h i a b c d e f g h i
Fig. 2‐10 REU, configuration of Connector Back Panel (CBP) and default settings
Ed. 08.17 2–13

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.2.2 Processor Board ETX-CPU Settings

VGA
X11 X51 n.a. X52
COM1
X12 KEYBOARD
X10
S1 COM4
X9
D6*)
n.a.
COM2
X49
X13 X3 X1
X4
COM3
X2
X7 X8
X15
X16
X14 V1.4 V6
1 2 3
V2
D4 n.a. n.a.
V4
X47
X48
X46
X18
X20
1
+ V3
V5 n.a.
X17 BAT
X50
set open open set
1 2 3
*) only equipped for multi-IRQ function (see also section 2.2.4.3)
Fig. 2‐11 ETX‐CPU board, position and default setting of jumpers, connectors and LEDs
(example shows board with multi‐IRQ function, ref. no. 84045 84102)
JUMPER POSITION REMARKS
X15, X16 open, open For SIB board without multi‐IRQ function (ref. no. 84045 83106)
set, open For SIB board with multi‐IRQ function (ref. no. 84045 83107)
X17 set Normal operation mode of battery (battery connected)
open 'Parking' mode of battery (disconnected) for delivery or storage
X18 set Watchdog enabled
X46, X47, X48 Depending on SIB D3‐PAL type and type of remote control equipment:
1 2 3
REU‐SIB D3 P4N, used on SIB board P/N 84045 83106, without serial con
troller D6
1 2 3
REU‐SIB D3, used on SIB boards P/N 84045 83100 and 84045 83105,
without serial controller D6
1 2 3
REU‐SIB D3 Lx8, used on SIB board P/N 84045 83107, with

installed serial controller D6 for multi‐IRQ function
X49 set For enabling COM3 and COM 4 with D6
X50 2‐3 Ethernet interface enabled (previous with ETXmgx CPU type)
open Ethernet interface enabled (current with LX800 CPU type)
CONNECTOR MEANING
X12, 13, 8, 9 COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4
X14 USB interface(s), V1.0 standard PC host controller
X20 RJ45 (Ethernet) interface, 10/100Base‐T
X51, X52 AF‐audio
X7 INC panel connector (parallel printer port)
2–14 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
The signals assigned to the pins of the sockets of connectors X7 to X13 (component side view) and
the corresponding connected plugs are given as follows:
X7 ‐ INC panel connector (parallel printer port):
Pin X7 DB25 Signal Pin X7 DB25 Signal X7 DB25
1 1 /STB 14 20 /AFD 1 2 1
14
2 14 D0 15 8 /ERR
3 2 D1 16 21 /INIT
4 15 D2 17 9 /SLIN
5 3 D3 18 22 GND
6 16 D4 19 10 GND
7 4 D5 20 23 GND 13 26
13
25
8 17 D6 21 11 GND
9 5 D7 22 24 GND
10 18 /ACK 23 12 GND
11 6 BUSY 24 25 GND
12 19 PE 25 13 GND
13 7 SLCT 26 - GND
X10 ‐ keyboard/mouse connector:

Pin X10 DIN Signal Pin X10 DIN Signal
X10 DIN
1 - - 6 1 KeybClk 1
2 - GND 7 4 GND 4
1 2
3 - MouseClk 8 5 +5V 2
4 - MouseDat 9 - UBAT 9 10 5
5 2 KeybDat 10 - PowerGood 3
(Reset CPU)
X11 - VGA connector: X11 DB15

1 11
Pin X11 DB15 Signal Pin X11 DB15 Signal
1 1 Red 6 6 GND 1 2
2 4 GND 7 13 HSYNC
3 2 Green 8 7 GND 9 10
4 5 GND 9 14 VSYNC 5 15
5 3 Blue 10 8 GND
X12,13,8,9 - COM1 to COM4 (without multi-IRQ): X8,9,12,13 DB9

Pin X DB9 Signal Pin X DB9 Signal 1 2 1
6
1 1 DCD 6 8 CTS
2 6 DSR 7 4 DTR 9 9
10 5
3 2 RxD 8 9 RI
4 7 RTS 9 5 GND
5 3 TxD 10 - X12 S12
1 2 (OIO3)
X12,13,8,9 - COM1 to COM4 (with multi-IRQ): 32
for pin assignments of X8 (COM3), X9 (COM4), X12 (COM1) X9 9 10
and X13 (COM2), and of S12 (OIO3), see also section 2.2.4.3. 1 2
9 10 X13
1 2
LED COLOR MEANING

X8 9 10
V3 green (blinking) Access on flash disk 1 2
V5 red Battery faulty or empty 1
or jumper X17 is open 9 10 cable ref. no. 24009 28 242
c a
V6 green Watchdog enabled

(jumper X18 is set)
V2 yellow Indicates Ethernet accessible
V4 green (blinking) Indicates activity on Ethernet line
Ed. 08.17 2–15

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.2.3 SIB Settings
RSU
X32
X35
X33
3
CTU 2
1
X34
2a1
1a1
1a1
1 1
2 2
3 3
2a1
CTU
1 2 3
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐12 SIB setting: 1a1, 2a1 configuration (e.g.: CTU connected)
NOTE: The communication channels have to be set independently from each other. To ensure
a correct operation of the SIB board, the following jumper settings are always necessary:
'No DMA Operation' (X7, position 2-3) and '2 Wait States' (X36 set), see Fig. 2‐17.
CONFIGURATION 1a1 (RSU) X33 X35 Remark
RS422 Operation*
100 Ohm termination set x with RSU*
100 Ohm termination not set - without RSU*
Send Enable via RTS x RS485
Continuous Send-Enable - Default setting
Channel not in operation - -
CONFIGURATION 2a1 (CTU) X32 X34 Remark
RS422 Operation*:
100 Ohm termination set x with CTU*
100 Ohm termination not set - without CTU*
Send Enable via RTS x RS485
Continuous Send-Enable - Default setting
Channel not in operation - -
*NOTE: A 100 Ohm termination must be provided for the 1a1 and 2a1 RS422 connections if CTU (RSU) is connected. This 100 Ohm
termination must also located and set on the CTU (RSU). The termination concerns the RX path of the RS422 connection
in both directions.
-=jumper not set x= jumper set
2–16 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
X58
X57
X56
X55
X52
X59
1 TTL
X53
X54
TTL
RS232 X43
3
2
RS422 1
X8
1 1
2 2
3 3
1 2 3
X62
RS422
X60
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐13 SIB setting: 1a3 configuration (example: RS232)
CONFIGURATION 1a3 (ZUA+NFK1+NFK2) X43 X52...X59 X8 X60 X62 Remark
RS232 Operation x - - - - Default setting

TTL Operation - x - - -
RS422 Operation* - - x
100 Ohm termination set x
100 Ohm termination not set -
Send Enable via RTS 1-2
Continuous Send Enable 2-3 Default setting
Channel not in operation - - - - -
*NOTE: A 100 Ohm termination must be provided for the 1a3/RS422 connection if nothing is connected at the output.
Ed. 08.17 2–17

RCSE 443 RMMC
X51
X50
X49
X44
1
TTL X46
TTL
X48
TTL X47
X45
RS232 X42
3
RS422 RS422 2
1
X63
X9
1 1
2 2
3 3
RS422 X61
1 2 3
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐14 SIB setting: 2a3 configuration (example: RS232)
CONFIGURATION 2a3 (e.g. DME) X42 X44...X51 X9 X61 X63 Remark
RS232 operation x - - - - Default setting

TTL operation - x - - -
RS422 Operation* - - x
Channel not in operation - - - - -
*NOTE: A 100 Ohm termination must be provided for the 2a3/RS422 connection if nothing is connected at the output.
2–18 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
3
2
1
1
1
2 2
3 3
1 2 3
X22
1sB/TTL
X17
X12 1sA/TTL
X21 X15
X20 X13
1sB/TTL
X27 X16
1sA/TTL
X26 X14
1 1 1
X25 X19
X24 X18
X23 X10
1sB/RS232
X11 1sA/RS232
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐15 SIB setting: 1sA, 1sB configuration (example: TTL)
CONFIGURATION 1sA, 1sB X11 X20...27 X10 X12...19 Remark
1sA (LGM-1): RS232 operation x - - -

TTL operation - x - - Default setting
1sB (LGM-2): RS232 operation - - x -

TTL operation - - - x Default setting
Channels not in operation - - - -
Ed. 08.17 2–19

RCSE 443 RMMC
X6
3
2
1
RS422
1 1
2 2
3 3
1 2 3
X28
RS422
X29
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐16 SIB setting: 2sA configuration (example: TTL)
CONFIGURATION 2sA (LGM-3) X6 X28 X29 Remark

TTL operation - - - Default setting
RS422 operation* x
Channel not in operation - - -
*NOTE: A 100 Ohm termination must be provided for the 2sA/RS422 connection if nothing is connected at the output.
DRQ=DMA Request
CONFIGURATION 2sB (LGM-4)

Remark
TTL Operation No jumper setting Always TTL
2–20 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
X37 (1WS)
X39 (4WS)
X36 (2WS)
X38 (8WS)
X31
X30
X40
3
2
X41
1
DMA DMA
1 1
2 2
3 3
DMA
1 2 3
X7
DMA
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐17 SIB setting: no DMA operation, 2 wait states for synchronous channels (default setting)
NOTE: The following jumper settings must not be changed, otherwise the correct operation of
the SIB board is not ensured.
CONFIGURATION of DMA Operation
X7 X30/X31 X40/X41 Remark

Full duplex DMA via DRQ 1,3 1-2 x x
No DMA Operation 2-3 - - Default setting
CONFIGURATION of Waitstates (WS) for all synchronous channels (1sA, 1sB, 2sA, 2sB)
X36 X37 X38 X39 Remark

1 WS - x - -
2 WS x - - - Default setting
4 WS - - - x
8 WS - - x -
NOTE: Only one jumper is set at a time.
Ed. 08.17 2–21

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.2.4 NFK Settings
F3 F2 F1
B38
B36
B35
B28
B26
B25
B18
B16
B15
A B A B A B A B A B A B
B39 B37 B29 B27 B19 B17 refer to 1) below

B B B
A A A
B64
B63
B34
B33
B32
B31
B24
B23
B22
B21
B14
B13
B12
B11
B
A
B44
B43
B42
B41
B54
B53
B52
B51
B64
B63
B62
B61
B B B
A A A
B49 B47 B59 B57 B69 B67
B48
B46
B45
B58
B56
B55
B68
B66
B65
F4 F5 F6
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐18 NFK, position of jumpers and default settings (2-wire operation)
CONFIGURATION (x=channel 1...6) Bx1 Bx2 Bx3 Bx4 Bx5 Bx6 Bx7 Bx8 Bx9
Amplification 0 dB x
Amplification 20 dB -
Service line or true standby line x - x -

Simulated standby line - x - x
Service line with simulated standby line x x x x
4-wire operation - - x - x - x - x -
2-wire operation x x - x - x - x - x
1) Special application LGMx to NFK:

NFK channel 6 supplied internally with La/Lb of LGM modem, NFK channel 6 converts LGM output signal from 2- or 4-wire operation
with special B64/B63 setting (Refer also to section 2.3.2.1.).
-=Jumper not set x= Jumper set
2–22 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2.3.2.5 Modem IC LGM 28.8 DL Settings (new model since 2015)

This modem features 20 DIP switches in two blocks with 10 switches each: S1.1 … S1.10 and
S2.1 … S2.10). The setting of the DIP switches S2.6 … S2.10 defines the meaning of the other
switches.
S1.1 … S1.10 S2.1 … S2.10
To define the settings, only
use the DIP switches at the
bottom of the unit
default settings
S1.1 … S1.10 S2.1 … S2.10
Fig. 2‐19 Mod IC LGM 28.8 DL, position of DIP switches and default settings
Dialing mode: Automatic recognition of type of modulation, V.25bis, auto reliable mode,
flow control with RTS/CTS (S2/M2), autobaud (AT), pulse dial mode
S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 S1.5 S1.6 S1.7 S1.8 S1.9 S1.10
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S2.5 S2.6 S2.7 S2.8 S2.9 S2.10
Dedicated line mode: V.32 (9600 bit/s), error correction with direct mode 10 bit/sign, flow control with
RTS/CTS (S2/M2), autobaud (AT), 2-wired dedicated line
S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 S1.5 S1.6 S1.7 S1.8 S1.9 S1.10
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF for RCSE/RMC
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF for NAV-LCU
S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S2.5 S2.6 S2.7 S2.8 S2.9 S2.10
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
Ed. 08.17 2–23

RCSE 443 RMMC
Special DFS Mode (RCSE < = > LLZ 421)
RCSE DEE Baudrate 2400, Modem Baudrate 2400, LLZ DEE Baudrate 9600
Different Latency delay (RCSE -> Station)

- LGM 28.8 (obs.) 110 ms
- LGM 28.8 DL 210 ms bis 310 ms
S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 S1.5 S1.6 S1.7 S1.8 S1.9 S1.10
OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF RCSE/RMC
OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF LLZ 421
S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S2.5 S2.6 S2.7 S2.8 S2.9 S2.10
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON RCSE/RMC
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON LLZ 421
On the LLZ 421 modem connector, connect wire RTS (pin 13c) to GND (pin 16c), see Fig. 2‐20 below.
96 pol. modem
connector
WIre RTS (pin 13c) to GND

(Ground, pin 16c) on Station
DEE (wire on Speedy connector 13
pin 4-9).
16
Fig. 2‐20 Mod IC LGM 28.8 DL, front view, modem connectors
2–24 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2.3.2.6 LGM28.8 Settings (obsolete since 2014)
S4
1
OFF
ST1
ON
2 LB1
3
BU3
1 2 3
BU2
1 5
D5 2 6
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D4 ST2
S1
BU1
1 2 3
S3 (side view)
1 2 3 4 5 6 S2
OFF
4
ON
LB1 open : BU2 pin 25b = AF signal set open set

LB1 closed : BU2 pin 25b = time slot open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐21 LGM28.8, position of jumpers and default settings

Dialing mode: Automatic recognition of type of modulation, V.25bis, auto reliable mode,
flow control with RTS/CTS (S2/M2), autobaud (AT), pulse dial mode
S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 S1.5 S1.6 S1.7 S1.8 S1.9 S1.10
S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S2.5 S2.6 S2.7 S2.8 S2.9 S2.10
Dedicated line mode: V.32 (9600 bit/s), error correction with direct mode 10 bit/sign, flow control with
RTS/CTS (S2/M2), autobaud (AT), 2-wired dedicated line
S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 S1.5 S1.6 S1.7 S1.8 S1.9 S1.10
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF for RCSE/RMC
ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF for NAV-LCU
S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4 S2.5 S2.6 S2.7 S2.8 S2.9 S2.10
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
ST1 Receive level range:
Level at Z ST1
-43 dBm 1 - 2 (delivery setting)
-33 dBm 2-3
ST2 Transmit level range:
Switched line at Z ST2 Dedicated line (600 W) ST2
-4.5 dBm 3-5 -6 dBm 3-5
-6.5 dBm 5-6 -8 dBm 5-6
-8.5 dBm 3 - 4 (default setting) -10 dBm 3-4
-10.5 dBm 1-2 -12 dBm 1-2
ATTENTION
Some telephone networks may prohibit alteration of the transmit level
Ed. 08.17 2–25

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.2.7 LGM64K Settings
S4
LB1
OFF
ON
BU3
BU2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D5
D4
S1
1 2 3 4
BU1 S2
S3 (side view)
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
ON
LB1 open : BU2 Pin 25b = AF signal

LB1 closed : BU2 Pin 25b = time slot
Fig. 2‐22 LGM64K, position of jumpers and default settings
S3.2 S3.3 S3.4 S3.5 S3.6 Default settings, software mode

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Only DIP switches S3.2 to S3.6 are active in software
mode with these default settings. All other configurations
are set by software.
Default setting LGM64K:

ISDN, D-channel, B-channel, AT commands, autobaud, asynchronous
2–26 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2.3.2.8 ZUA29 Settings
W118 -24
W116 -12
W106 W104
-6
-3
W114
W112
amplifiction
W105 W103
W108 W102
(+)
(0) W107 W101
W109
W218 W117
W216 W115
W214 W113
W212 W111
Transmit level (dBm)
Receive level (dB)
W110
W208
(+) 4-wire
(0) W207
W401
W402
W217
W215
W213
W211
W411 W412
W409 W410
W407 W408
W307
W305
W303
W301
W311
W309
W405 W406
W404
W403
attenuation
(0)
(+)
W308
W306
W304
W302
W312
W310
+12
+24
-24
-12
-6
-3
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐23 ZUA, position of jumpers and default settings (4-wire, -6 dBm, 600 Ohm)
CONFIGURATION W 107 108 207 208 REMARKS

4-wire operation - x - x RCSE operating with NFK29
2-wire operation x - x - Stand alone with one substation only
CONFIGURATION W 101 102 109 110

IN-impedance 600 ohms x - x -
CONFIGURATION W 103 104 105 106

OUT-impedance 600 ohms x - x -
CONFIGURATION W 411 412

Baudrate 1200 Bd, V.23 - x
CONFIGURATION W 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312
Transmit level -6 dB x - - x x - x -
Receive level 0 dB x - x -
CONFIGURATION W 410 409 408 407 406 405 REMARKS

2/4-wire operation - x - x x - without amplifier
4-wire amplifier - x - x - x
2-wire amplifier - x x - - x
-=no jumper x= jumper set
Ed. 08.17 2–27

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.2.9 ZU1 Settings
a
ST7 a
ST2 ST8
b
b
ST4
b a a
b a a
ST9
ST3 a b
a ST10
b ST18/19
ST6 a
a b c b
ST5 b d ST11
b
a
b a
ST21 ST12
b
c a a b
b
ST13
a b a
ST16
b b
ST14 ST15
a a
a
ST20 ST17
b
b a
set open set

open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐24 ZU1, position of jumpers and default settings (4-wire operation, 600 Ohm)

3 a left no test operation
5 a right Idle tone disconnectable
6 a top no test operation
7 a top no extraneous feed
8...12 b down 2-wire operation
8...12 a top 4-wire operation
14 a down Points of disconnection for adjustment receive filter
15 b top Points of disconnection for adjustment receive filter
16 b left TxD-polarity, positive
20 a,b Points of disconnection for adjustment receive filter
21 a 2nd from right Transmitter may be modulated
17 b down Application: positive stop polarity (for CSB station with inverter)
a top Application: negative stop polarity (for CSB station without inverter)
18/19 a top coarse Adjustment of transmit level at ZU1:
2 a right fine attenuation 0 dBm; U=1100 mVss
4 a right fine
13 b top Receive level at ZU1: from -36 dBm to -10 dBm; U= 35...693 mVss
2–28 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2.3.2.10 LGM9600H1 Settings
BR1
2
S4 3
OFF
ON
ST2 LB1
1 5
ST1
BU3
1 2 3
BR2
BU2
2 6
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
D5
D4 S1
BU1
1 2 3
S3 (side view) S2
1 2 3 4 5 6
4
OFF
ON
LB1 open : BU2 pin 25b = AF signal set open set

LB1 closed : BU2 pin 25b = time slot open
1 2 3
Fig. 2‐25 LGM9600H1, position of jumpers and default settings
Default setting LGM9600H1 (used to connect MK20A stations via dedicated line to the RCSE):
V.23, 1200 baud, half duplex (HX), asynchronous, pulse dialling, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit, 8 data bits,
1 parity bit (odd parity)
S1.1 S1.2 S1.3 S1.4 S1.5 S1.6 S1.7 S1.8 S1.9 S1.10
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
S2.1 S2.2 S2.3 S2.4

OFF OFF OFF OFF
S3.1 S3.2 S3.3 S3.4 S3.5 S3.6

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
ST1 Receive level range:

Level at Z ST1
-43 dBm 1 - 2 (delivery setting)
-33 dBm 2-3
ST2 Transmit level range:

Switched line at Z ST2 Dedicated line (600 W) ST2
-4.5 dBm 3-5 -6 dBm 3-5
-6.5 dBm 5-6 -8 dBm 5-6
-8.5 dBm 3 - 4 (default setting) -10 dBm 3-4
-10.5 dBm 1-2 -12 dBm 1-2
Ed. 08.17 2–29

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.2.11 LGM1200MD Settings
Test
OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
BU2
BR1
1 2 3
S1
1 2 3 4
S2
open set
set
open 1 2 3
Fig. 2‐26 LGM1200MD, position of jumpers and default settings (2-wire, 300 Ohm)
Permanent transmission control S2.1
on OFF default setting
off ON
Operation 1200/600 bit/s S2.2
1200 bit/s OFF default setting
600 bit/s ON
Transmit level S1.9 S1.10
1 ±0 dBm OFF OFF
2 -3 dBm ON OFF
3 -6 dBm OFF ON default setting
4 -9 dBm ON ON
Impedance during transmission S1.8
300 ohms OFF for remote side (e.g. RCSE)
600 ohms ON for station side
Receive level (min.) S1.7
-43 dBm OFF default setting
-33 dBm ON
Carrier lag time S1.6
13 ms OFF
3 ms ON default setting
S2-M2 lead time S1.5
30 ms OFF default setting
200 ms ON
Additional equalizer S1.4
Equalizer switched on OFF
Equalizer switched off ON default setting
2–30 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Switching on mode S1.3

Fixed switching on (M1+) operation OFF default setting
Switching on with S1.1 ON
Operation mode S1.1 S1.2 S2.2
0...1200 bit/s, hx, asyn. (1300/2100 Hz) OFF OFF OFF default setting
0...1200 bit/s, hx, syn. with 1:1 change ON OFF OFF
0...1200 bit/s, hx, syn. without change OFF ON OFF
not used ON ON OFF
0...600 bit/s, hx, asyn. (1300/1700 Hz) OFF OFF ON
Sensitivity increase (-53 dBm) BR1
Sensitivity higher + add. equalizer 1-2
Sensitivity normal 2-3 default setting
2.3.2.12 INC Settings
No settings have to be done on the INC panel used as indication panel for the RCSE. The INC-LPT
adapter plate on the rear side of the INC panel provides connectors to the REU and to another optional
INC panel. The DIP switch and the jumper are not used (switched OFF resp. open jumper).
connector to another INC panel
87 6 54 32 1
ON connector to
parallel printer
interface X7 of the
REU ETX-CPU
INC-LPT connectors to
INC Panel power supply
(+5 V)
Fig. 2‐27 INC-LPT board on the INC rear side, position of connectors and jumpers
Ed. 08.17 2–31

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.2.13 LGM Extender 2 Unit Settings
RS422
RS232
CLOSED=INVERT
TXD X20 X30
RTS X21 X31
DTR X22 X32
LEDs
V1 to RI X23 X33
V16 DSR X24 X34
DCD X25 X35
CTS X26 X36
RXD X27 X37
1
USED
COM IDENT
X10 X1
X11
CLOSED OPEN
X12 X38
RS232 RS422
X13 X39
TERMINATOR
X14 X40
TERMINATOR
X15
1
X16
INT-VCC
+5V +12V X4 DC/DC Converter
1
RS232/422
X17
X18
X3 S1 S2
INT EXT
RS232-TEST (not used) (not used)
VCC
set open open set

1 2 3
Fig. 2‐28 LGM Extender 2 Unit, position of jumpers and settings (example: RS422 without
termination)
CONFIGURATION X10..15 X16..18 X30..37 X38 X39..40 Remarks
RS232, INT-VCC = 5 V 1-2 1-2 1-2 set open Default setting
RS422, INT-VCC = 5 V 1-2 1-2 2-3 open Connection to CTU

without termination open
with termination set
Inversion of output signals X20..27

not active open Default setting
active set
NOTE: Depending on used LGMx slot (x=1..4, but only at LGM4 all signals are available), the
corresponding interface on the SIB board (1sA for LGM1, 1sB for LGM2, 2sA for LGM3,
2sB for LGM4) has to be set to TTL level (see section 2.3.2.3).
The LEDs V1 to V16 on the LGM Extender 2 Unit (see Fig. 2‐28) indicate the signal levels of the RS232
lines (DCD, RXD, TXD, DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS, RI):
- red LED on (back row: V1, V3, V6, V7, V10, V11, V14, V15): signal level is +12 V
- green LED on (front row: V2, V4, V5, V8, V9, V12, V13, V16): signal level is -12 V
- LEDs off (both rows): signal level is 0 V
2–32 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2.3.2.14 OIO Settings

32
32
a b RA1
RA2
J1
RA3 1' 1
1
7
J3*
RA4 **
1
1
set open set

* set standard address: 230
open
1 2 3 ** optional instead of zero ohm resistors for output (depends on configuration)
Fig. 2‐29 OIO (example: 24x Input, 8x Output), position of jumpers and default settings
32
32
a b RA1
RA2
J1
RA3 1' 1
1
RA4 **
J3*
1
1
set open set

* set standard address: 230
open
1 2 3 ** optional instead of zero ohm resistors for output (depends on configuration)
Fig. 2‐30 OIO (example) new PCB version with four piggybacks
Ed. 08.17 2–33

RCSE 443 RMMC
Combinations
RA1 OUTPUT
RA2 INPUT
RA3 OUTPUT 1' 1

1
7
RA4** INPUT
J3*
1
1
IN OUT
OIO Typ 16 / 16 84045 83301
RA1 OUTPUT RA1 OUTPUT
RA2 INPUT
OUTPUT RA2 OUTPUT
J1
RA3 OUTPUT 1' 1 RA3 OUTPUT 1' 1
1 1
7 7
RA4** INPUT
J3* RA4** OUTPUT
J3*
1
1
1
1
IN OUT
OIO Typ 8 / 24 84045 83551 OIO Typ 32 OUT 84045 83511
RA1 INPUT
OUTPUT RA1 INPUT
RA2 INPUT RA2 INPUT

J1
RA3 INPUT
OUTPUT 1' 1 RA3 INPUT 1' 1
1 1
7 7
RA4** INPUT
OUTPUT
J3* RA4** INPUT
J3*
1
1
1
1
IN OUT
OIO Typ 24 / 8 84045 83311 OIO Typ 32 IN 84045 83561
Fig. 2‐31 OIO (example) combinations; reference numbers
2–34 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443

J3/1 (A8) 1 Bit 8 of I/O base address = 1
1' Bit 8 of I/O base address = 0*
J3/4 (A5) 1 Bit 5 of I/O base address = 1*
1' Bit 5 of I/O base address = 0
J3/5 (A4) 1 Bit 4 of I/O base address = 1*
1' Bit 4 of I/O base address = 0
Address setting: OIO 1 230 OIO 2 234 OIO 3 238 OIO 4 (reserve) 23C
1' 1 1' 1 1' 1 1' 1
1 1 1 1
7 7 7 7
J3* J3 J3 J3
Ed. 08.17 2–35

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.2.15 Multiplexer RS232 Settings
TTL TTL RS232/TTL

RS232 RS232 RS422
X39 X21 X27
TxD (red)
X22 X28
X40
X23 X29
RxD (green)
OPEN: TTL X24 X30
RS232 X25 X31
RS422 X26 X32
Ch1 X3
X4
Ch2 PAL
X5
X6 RS232/TTL
Ch3 X7 RS422
X8
(yellow) X33
Ch4 X34
X35
Ch5 RS232 TTL X36
X37
Ch6 X9 X15 X38
X10 X16
X11 X17
X12 X18
X13 X19
X14 X20
RS422 RS232/TTL
set open open set

1 2 3
Fig. 2‐32 Multiplexer RS232 (MPX), position of jumpers and default settings
The multiplexer RS232 is internally driven by the 1a3 (slot NFK-1) or 2a3 (slot NFK-2) channel of
the Connector Back Panel (CBP) of the Serial Interface Board (SIB).
The modes of the output channels 1 to 6 are configured via jumpers X8 to X38:
- Channel 1: X8, X9, X15, X21, X27, X33
- Channel 2: X7, X10, X16, X22, X28, X34
- Channel 3: X6, X11, X17, X23, X29, X35
- Channel 4: X5, X12, X18, X24, X30, X36
- Channel 5: X4, X13, X19, X25, X31, X37
- Channel 6: X3, X14, X20, X26, X32, X38
The jumper settings for the different modes are printed on the circuit board.
The output signals (for RS232/TTL: TXD, RXD, GND and for RS422: +TXD, -TXD, +RXD, -RXD)
of the 6 channels are led to the SubD 25 pin connector NFK-1 (if MPX plugged into slot NFK1) and
to NFK-2 (if MPX plugged into slot NFK2) on the back side of the remote control equipment.
The signals of RS232/TTL output channels (Ch1 to Ch6) are led to the following pins of NFK-1 resp.
NFK-2 connectors:
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6
Signal TXD: Pin 14 Pin 16 Pin 18 Pin 20 Pin 22 Pin 24
Signal RXD: Pin 1 Pin 3 Pin 5 Pin 7 Pin 9 Pin 11
Signal GND: Pin 15 Pin 17 Pin 19 Pin 21 Pin 23 Pin 25
2–36 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
The signals of RS422 output channels (Ch1 to Ch6) are led to following pins of NFK-1 resp. NFK-2
connectors:
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6
Signal +TXD: Pin 14 Pin 16 Pin 18 Pin 20 Pin 22 Pin 24
Signal -TXD: Pin 15 Pin 17 Pin 19 Pin 21 Pin 23 Pin 25
Signal +RXD: Pin 1 Pin 3 Pin 5 Pin 7 Pin 9 Pin 11
Signal -RXD: Pin 2 Pin 4 Pin 6 Pin 8 Pin 10 Pin 12
The modes of the input channels TXD and RXD have to be configured via jumpers X39 and X40. The
jumper settings for the different modes (RS232 or TTL) are printed on the circuit board.
The LEDs on the left side of the MPX board (see Fig. 2‐32) indicate the states of the input signals TXD
(red LED) and RXD (green LED) and the state of the output channels 1 to 6 (yellow LEDs). If the chan
nel is connected through, the LED is switched off.
NOTE: Depending on the type (ref. no.) of the Modem Backpanel board (MBP) actually used wit
hin the remote control equipment, some pins have to be connected via soldered wirings.
MBP with ref. no. 84045 81700:

1) +5 V from X3 a16,c16 to X5/X6 a12,c12 (+5V for MPX board)
2) TXD_E from X3 a24 to X5 c16 (ZU-1 -> NFK-1)
3) RXD_E from X3 a30 to X5 a16 (ZU-1 -> NFK-1)
4) TXD_E from X4 a24 to X6 c16 (ZU-2 -> NFK-2)
5) RXD_E from X4 a30 to X6 a16 (ZU-2 -> NFK-2)

1) +5 V from X5 a16,c16 to X6/X7 a12,c12 (+5V for MPX board)

no wiring connections necessary!
Ed. 08.17 2–37

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.3 Connection to the Public Telephone Network (PTT)
The connection to the PTT is achieved by the standardized angle connector TAE 6 N. The pin assign
ment is shown in the following figure:
TAE 6 N Sub D 9pin Canon D9

analog ISDN
1w La Tx-
4 ye E G 3 gn 2 br Lb Tx+
5 gr a2 Lb 2 br 3 pk a2 Rx-
6 pk b2 La 1 ws 4 gr b2 Rx+
5 gn G
6 ge E
7
8
9
RJ 12 * RJ45 *
1w not conn. 1 not conn.
2 br Tx+ 2 not conn.
3 pk Rx+ 3 Tx+
4 gr Rx- 4 Rx+
5 gn Tx- 5 Rx-
6 ge not conn. 6 Tx-
7 not conn.
8 not conn.
* RJ12 and RJ45 are alternative connectors to TAE 6 N
Fig. 2‐33 Pin assignment of connector TAE 6 N, RJ12 and RJ45 for connection to the PTT
2.3.4 Connection to an Ethernet Line (LAN Network Interface Link)

An connection to the Ethernet (LAN network) via the RJ45 interface at the REU back panel can be
performed in two different ways: a) using the RJ45 interface at the front face side of the ETX-CPU
processor board (see Fig 2‐34 and also section 2.3.2.2) or b) using the built-in RJ45 connector at
the rear panel.
Prerequisites for using the Ethernet (ETH) feature:
- The REU is equipped with a ETX-CPU processor board incl. Ethernet controller and RJ45 con
nector; check that the jumper X50 is set to position 2-3 ('Ethernet interface enabled').
- REU software version > 2.48.
Connecting the network cable from the RJ45 socket to the ETX-CPU (see Fig. 2‐34)
1. Switch off the power supply of the RCSE and open the RCSE cabinet.
2. a) With the older version of the ETX-CPU processor board (ref. no. 84045 84101):
Establishing an ETH connection on the front face side of ETX-CPU processor board: Feed the
network cable through the opening of optional rear LAN entry (see Fig. 1‐8) to the front.
Connect the network cable to the RJ45 connector at the front face side of the ETX-CPU board.
2–38 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
b) With the newer version of the ETX-CPU processor board (ref. no. 84045 84102):
Establishing an ETH connection the with built-in ETH connector on the rear panel (use the
internal patch cable ref. no. 97991 28638). Connect the patch cable to the inner rear RJ45
connector. Connect the other end of the patch cable to the RJ45 connector at the front face
side of the ETX-CPU board.
3. Close the RCSE cabinet and switch on the RCSE.
Prerequisites for the configuration of the network interface:
(1) The RCSE is connected to the Ethernet; (2) REU software version > 2.48 is implemented
(3) The correct *.sit file is loaded; (4) The MIB browser on the host system/server is installed.
The *.sit file contains the site-specific installation configuration. The file can be configured for opera
tion with or without network interface, because not each REU has a network interface facility. The *.sit
file for network interfacing contains a unique IP address (the one needed for the REU and all other
units), which enables the REU to access the network. It is set during the initialization of the processor
board network interface. The IP addresses are stored in the address table of the network stack. To
check whether the network interface is working, use the 'ping' command from a host to get a response
from the selected REU.
Ethernet line
Customer-defined ETX-CPU
Network cable processor board
with RJ45 connector
Pin Signal Type

1 TXTP+ Out
2 TXTP- Out
3 RXTP+ In
4,5 not conn. REU REU
6 RXTP- In RJ45 front view
rear view
7,8 not conn.
9,10 SHLD PWR
Fig. 2‐34 Connection to the Ethernet line via RJ45 connector of the ETX-CPU processor board
Ed. 08.17 2–39

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.3.5 Connection to a GPS Real-Time Clock Module

An external GPS real-time clock can be connected optionally to the RCSE, in order to synchronise
all time stamps throughout the RMMC system. The GPS clock module is fed by the RCSE +5 V output
pin of the IN/OUT connector, one of the serial connectors 1a3 or 2a3 has to be used to transfer the
GPS clock information data (i.e. actual date and time, position coordinates).
NOTE: The GPS clock module has to be installed with free visibility to air inside or outside.
The RCSE unit is switched off. Connect the cable to the GPS clock module and to the RCSE 443 back
panel as shown in Fig. 2‐35. Use an extension cable if needed. The PIN assignment of the connectors
at the RCSE back panel and of the GPS clock module is as follows:
IN/OUT (at RCSE) used for power supply of GPS clock module
3 AUX IN 3 8 AUX OUT 1
4 AUX IN 4 9 +5 V
5 AUX IN 5
1a3 or 2a3 (at RCSE) used for GPS clock data input
1 DCD 6 DSR
2 RxD 7 RTS
3 TxD 8 CTS
4 DTR 9 RI
5 Gnd
Mini DIN MD-6 (at connection cable resp. GPS clock) used for connection to GPS clock module
1 - 4 GND
2 RX 5 -
3 Vcc (5 V) 6 TX
Back panel of RCSE

1a3
IN/OUT 2a3
NOTE:
in-line fuse
To bridge greater distances between RCSE
and GPS module use PS/2 extension cable
(max. length for RS232 is approx. 15 m).
to RCSE, rear Connection cable

5Vcc from IN/OUT to IN/OUT to GPS clock module to 1a3 or 2a3
1 5
MD-6, female MD-6, male
6
front view Fuse 1AT front view front view
RX
Vcc 5 V
SubD, 9pin, female GND
TX
GPS clock
approx. 1.4 m
1 5
6 1 1 6
6
front view
RS232 to 1a3 or 2a3 to GPS-clock
Fig. 2‐35 Connecting and assignment of GPS clock module
2–40 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Initial Setup
2.4 INITIAL SETUP

This chapter describes the procedure for the initial setup of the equipment. It presumes that the equip
ment has been factory–aligned and tested. The configuration files are not yet loaded. The installation
must be in the following status:
- The external power supply and external equipment (e.g. ILS systems) are installed and cabled.
- The input voltage to the REU and the peripherals (e.g. CTU, optional) must correspond to the
assigned input voltage.
- The Dip–fix switches and jumpers of the relevant plug–in units must be set to the correct position
(refer to section 2.3.2).
- On the processor board ETX–CPU, the jumper X17 is set (the memory buffer battery is activated)
2.4.1 Initial Power up

Before the RCSE can be started up, the installation procedure must be completed and all the connec
tions must be made. The power switch for the supply voltage must be set to the off–position.
First switch on the AC–switch or DC–switch (depending on type of converter) on the rear of the REU
(see Fig. 2‐36). The power supply LEDs on the REU and the Life LED on the SIB should light up when
the voltage is applied.
As soon as the device is switched on, the REU initialization routine starts automatically:
– the boot procedure is performed,
– the main REU program is loaded while the green LED V3 of the flash disk on the processor board
is blinking (see also section 2.4.2.1),
– the start procedures are running, etc.
After the start of the program, the LED text field of each station (in the area EQUIPMENT–MAIN STA
TUS on the INC panel) shows the text 'Wait' for about 10 s. The initialization procedure is taking
around 20 s altogether. A tone is emitted by the buzzer.
Since the configuration files (e.g. *.sit) are not yet loaded, the main status of station no. 8 in the area
EQUIPMENT–MAIN STATUS on the INC panel shows the alternating texts 'No' and 'stat' (that means
'no station'). The status indications of the other connected stations are all switched off. After the con
figuration of the REU (described in section 2.4.2), the subsystem names and states of the connected
stations are indicated on the INC. The NORMAL indicators light up for the various subsystems during
normal operation. If no maintenance data terminal is connected, the RCSE can commence operation.
NOTE: The reaction of the (optional) connected CTU is described in section 7.4.4.
On/Off switch if AC/DC converter

REU-subrack, rear side used (no function for DC).
On/Off switch if DC/DC converter

used (no function for AC)
Fig. 2‐36 Location of the On/Off switches at the REU subrack (rear side)
Ed. 08.17 2-41

RCSE 443 RMMC
Initial Setup Description and Operation
2.4.2 Configuration of the REU with PC and ADRACS
1. Switch on the PC and run Windows.
NOTE: The installation and use of the PC User Program is described in the Technical Manual
ADRACS (ref. no. 83140 55324). It is recommended to become familiar with the menus
of the user program before performing the first set up procedure.
2. Click on 'Start', select 'Programs', program group 'Adracs Remote Controlling', program 'Adracs
Remote Controlling Software' to start the user program ADRACS.
3. Perform the login procedure at the PC. Acknowledge 'User 1, Level 5' by clicking on 'OK'.
4. Select 'Control' in the ADRACS main window.
5. Select the menu 'File Transfer' of the 'RC Management' window.
6. Copy the configuration files (*.sit, *.ptt, *.oio) of the configuration floppy to the REU with
command 'Copy PC file to RAM' of the menu 'File Transfer'.
7. Select the function 'Reset SITE' of the menu 'File Transfer' to activate the loaded files.
NOTE: Due to this reset, ADRACS will be terminated. It has to be restarted manually.
8. Start the user program ADRACS again (see step 2). Perform the login procedure (see step 3).
9. Select the function 'Control' in the ADRACS main window.
10. Load the station–relevant files (*.lke) to the REU via the 'File Transfer' command 'UpDate LKE
Files'. Select the function 'Reset Site' of the menu 'File Transfer' to activate the loaded files.
Start the user program ADRACS again (see step 2). Perform the login procedure (see step 3).
11. Select the menu 'DateTimeREU' in the 'RC Management' window.

Set date and time and acknowledge by clicking on 'Set New'. Close the 'Date&Time REU'
window.
12. Close the 'RC Management' window. Logout and exit from the user program.
NOTE: In case of any faulty reaction after switching on the configured RCSE (e.g. with a
non–blinking life LED on the SIB or with a permanent resetting of the RCSE) a special pro
cedure has to be performed which is described in chapter 2.4.3.
2.4.2.1 Actualization of the REU Application Program (REU.EXE)

After delivery, the REU application program (standard version) is stored on the EPROM side of the
flash disk on the ETX–CPU processor board. This software is loaded during initial power up procedure
(see section 2.4.1).
If the REU application program has to be actualized by the user, the new REU.EXE file must be loaded
from the PC to the RAM side of the flash disk (using the ADRACS command 'Copy PC file to RAM',
see above). During the next start–up of the system, the software is searching for an REU.EXE file on
the RAM side of the flash disk. If the executable file exists there, it is used for startup. Otherwise the
standard REU.EXE on the EPROM side is used. If the standard executable file on the EPROM side is
damaged, the procedure in section 2.4.3 has to be performed.
2-42 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
2.4.2.2 Setting of PTT file
1. Run the 'Adracs Remote Controlling Software' again. Perform the login procedure.
2. Click on 'Control' in the ADRACS main window.
3. Select the menu 'File Transfer' in the 'RC Management' window and click on command 'Edit pho
nenumber File'.
The window 'File Manager PC (Open File)' appears. Select the corresponding *.ptt file to open the
file for configuration entries. The window 'Phone numbers of <site name>.PTT' provides a filing cabi
net with cards for each subsystem to define modem settings and phone numbers (see Fig. 2‐37 and
2‐38).
Phonenumbers of ILS-RMC.PTT X
16
12 13 14 15
8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7
ILS-RMC Shawnee Stuttgart Gorgonzola
Modem1
Mode: Disable V.25bis Direct Reliable
Init String: ATS0=1\N7S51=255\Q2F255X4S10=2S20=0 Baud: 19200
Modem2
Init String: Baud: 0
Modem3
Modem4
Additional Modem settings

REU-ID-OWN: 3
Modem process time [ms]: 0
Modem reliable factor: 0
Init modem all 2 min.:
SAVE ABORT HELP
Fig. 2‐37 Window to define modem settings within *.ptt file (example)
Ed. 08.17 2-43

RCSE 443 RMMC
Phonenumbers of ILS-RMC.PTT X
16
12 13 14 15
8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7
ILS-RMC Shawnee Stuttgart Gorgonzola
Phonenumber1: Shawnee Gorgonzola

Phonenumber2:
Phonenumber3:
Phonenumber4: ATS0=0DT0071182112345
Connection after Start: Yes No REU-ID: 10 NEW: 10
Call time: 00:00:00 [day:hour:min] (First connection time after REU start time, 0=no call)
Time interval: 00:00:00 [day:hour:min] (Time interval for periodic connections, 0=no call)
Min. interval: 00:00:00 [day:hour:min] (Min. time interval of last con. initiat. by other REU, 0=OFF)
Data com off: 0 [sec] (Data Com off Distance TIMEOUT, 0=no action)
First retry: 00:00:00 [day:hour:min] (Time of next call attempt after last bad call)
Max. bad call: 0 [0..255] (Maximum number of bad call attempts)

00:00:0
Retry time: 00:00:00 [day:hour:min] (Time of next call after bad call attempts reached, 0=no call)
0
DataComNb: 00:00:0
0 [0..255] (Switch lamp off after max. bad call attempts, 0=no action)
00 [sec] (Report good/bad time after change MAINSTATE, 0=no action)
Good/Bad:
Priority: 5 [0..5] (Back call is performed, if the caller priority is higher)
Don't use Modem:

1 2 3 4
Station type is DME or NDB SAVE ABORT HELP
Fig. 2‐38 Window to define telephone numbers within *.ptt file (example)
2.4.2.3 Explanation of Modem Setting

V AT-/V.25bis modems
AT modems (Hayes compatible) as well as V.25bis modems are supported. The setting for the modem
type occurs in the configuration file REU- CONF.SIT. This setting can be overwritten with the PTT file.
The following two modem connection modes are supported:
- DIRECT–MODE
The baud rate between REU and modem is the same as the baud rate between the two modems.
The data is sent to the modem path without buffering. Handshaking is not necessary. Fault correcti
on or data compression is not possible. This mode is suitable for the virtual link (former 'Face Link')
to Navaids stations like DME 415 or TACAN TAC 453.
- RELIABLE MODE
This is at least a connection of the type MNP4 or V.42. If additionally a data compression is selected,
the type is called MNP5 or V.42bis. The baud rate between REU and modem can differ from that
between the two modems. It is convenient to set the baud rate from the REU to the modem as high
as possible (e.g. 38400 baud). Data buffering takes place in the modems. Therefore a RTS/CTS
hardware handshake is necessary.
2-44 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
V Configuration of AT modems
The advantage of AT ('ATtention') modems are the various configuration possibilities. The following
standard initialisation strings are available which are sent automatically from the REU to AT modems:
- Init string 'ATZ0', that means
Z0 : reset with following loading of EPROM configuration
- Init-String 'ATE0V1X1S0=1S2=255', that means
E0 : echo off
V1 : message code as text (because of baud rate in CONNECT message)
X1 : message codes with state of the baud rate and also dialing without dial tone
S0=1 : receive calls after one ring
S2=255 : accepting no abort sign
- Init–String 'AT&S1&D3', that means
&S1 : M1 (DSR) on at data connection
&D3 : ON–OFF change at S1 (DTR) interrupts connection and resets modem (ATZ0)
- Modem process time: necessary for external GSM modems (Siemens M20, usually 2000 ms)
Modem reliable factor: necessary for external GSM modems (factor 0)
Init modem all 2 min.: option for external modems
V Reliability of a modem connection (connection build–up mode)
The reliability of a modem connection is depending on the selected build–up mode. Two different
build–up modes are available. The safer mode is the BACK–CALL.
- NO-BACK-CALL: Build up due to a single call and identification (START CALL).
- BACK-CALL: Build up due to a call and identification. Then back call and identification
(START CALL, BACK CALL). Setting the priority to 0 in the *.ptt file of the
called site.
V Setting of modems LGM9600H1 / LGM1200MD
After jumper setting described in sections 2.3.2.10 and 2.3.2.11 the modems are ready for operation.
V Setting of modem LGM28.8D1
Different configurations are possible. For example as universal reliable mode modem:
- Basic setting: : 2 (factory delivery state)
- Baud rate : 38400 Baud
- Modem mode : Reliable–Mode
- PTT–Init–String : 'AT\N2S51=12\Q2F255X4S10=100S20=0'
- Dial string : 'AT'+'DP' or 'DT'+'telephone number' <blank> 'host name' of this phone
number
V Setting of modem LGM64K

Different configurations are possible. For example as a 'universal reliable mode' modem:
- Basic setting : 2 (factory delivery state)
- Baud rate : 19200 Baud
- Modem mode : Reliable–Mode
- PTT–Init–String : 'AT\N7S51=255\Q2F255X4S96=1S47=3'
- Dial string : 'AT'+'S0=0D'+ 'telephone number' <blank> 'host name' of this phone
number
V Dedicated line connection between REU and REU

Setting the 'Data com off' timeout to 10 sec. (range from 1..32767 sec., standard is 10 sec.).
Ed. 08.17 2-45

RCSE 443 RMMC
2.4.3 Faulty Switching–on RCSE Behavior after Configuration

If the RCSE 443 is reacting faulty when switched on after the configuration, for example with a
non–blinking life LED on the SIB or with permanent resetting of the RCSE), it may be possible that
one or more of the configuration files *.sit, *.ptt, *.oio, *.lke at the RAM side of the REU (part of the
flash disk on the processor board) are damaged or wrong for this site.
NOTE: Modification of configuration data defined in the *.sit and *.oio files is partly possible by the user.
Clicking on the pull–down menu 'Config' of the 'RC Management' window calls a configuration tool,
providing access to some configuration data for modification. A more detailed description how to get
access to these file types is given in section 3.2.5.
A special AUTOBOOT.BAT file is installed on the flash disk of the processor board ETX–CPU, which
supports the deletion of the incorrect, wrong data on the disk. Two types of service adapters, called
dongle, are available, which have to be connected to the PC2 (diagnosis) interface at the RCSE (see
Fig. 2‐39). After the deletion, the standard application program is started to reconfigure the processor
board.
To initiate the deletion of the wrong contents of the RAM side (drive d: of the flash disk) on the RCSE
443 the following steps have to be carried out:
1. Switch off the RCSE 443
2. Connect the dongle of type B with the RCSE's PC2 interface
3. Switch on the RCSE 443
4. Wrong contents of the RAM side (i.e. the configuration files) is deleted
5. Repeat the configuration procedure described in section 2.4.2.
In case of a possible incorrect REU application program (REU.EXE on the EPROM side drive c: of the
flash disk) the dongle of type A has to be connected to the PC2 (diagnosis) interface to delete the
wrong application program and to load a standard application program from the corresponding sub
directory of the EPROM side.
1a2/PC1 OIO 1 OIO 2 S12
2a2/PC2
2a1/CTU
PC2 interface
(Diagnosis) 1a1/RSU -12V +12V
1a3
2a3
Fig. 2‐39 RCSE rear side with PC2 interface to connect a dongle type A or type B
The dongles of type A and B are both SubD 9 female connectors. At both types two pins have to be
connected via a short cable:
- dongle type A: connection between pin 4 (DTR) and pin 9 (RI)

1
6
- dongle type B: connection between pin 7 (RTS) and pin 9 (RI) solder side
1
6
2-46 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Operation
CHAPTER 3
OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
This chapter describes the operation of the RCSE in the RCMS 443 for Navaids 400 (SYSTEM 4000)
ILS, VOR and DME subsystems. It includes details of the INC panel and the PC user program
ADRACS. The description and use of ADRACS can be found in the technical manual P/N 83140
55324. The INC is shown in Fig. 3‐2. The operation and the panel of the CTU is described in section
7.4.5.
3.2 OPERATION OF THE RCSE/REU

3.2.1 Switching On the RCSE/REU
NOTE: For the described switching–on procedure it is assumed that the configuration of the REU
(see section 2.4.2) has already be done (i.e. configuration files are loaded).
- AC power supply: The mains switch of the AC supply is located on the rear.
Set the switch to 'I' (upper position). As a result, the control LED of the AC converter and the Life
LED of the SIB board inside are on (see Fig. 3‐1).
- DC power supply: The ON/OFF switch of the DC supply is located on the rear.
Set the switch to 'ON' (upper position). As a result, the control LED of the DC converter and the
Life–LED of the SIB inside are on (see Fig. 3‐1).
When the unit is switched on, the REU starts up automatically. This takes around 20 seconds altogeth
er. After the start of the program, all LED text fields above the columns where the stations are config
ured (area EQUIPMENT–MAIN STATUS on the INC panel) show the text 'Wait' for about 10 s. An
acoustic signal is emitted by the buzzer. Following, the subsystem names and the states of the con
nected stations are indicated on the INC panel. The NORMAL indicators light up for the various sub
systems during normal operation. If no maintenance data terminal is connected, the RCSE can com
mence operation.
NOTE: In case of a faulty switching–on behaviour of the RCSE (e.g. non–blinking Life LED or per
manent reset), a special procedure has to be performed described in section 2.4.3.
On/Off switch if AC/DC converter used On/Off switch if DC/DC converter used
(no function for DC) (no function for AC)
REU Control LED
DC-Converter
Life LED SIB

rear INC
front
Fig. 3‐1 Position of the On/Off–switch at RCSE, indication panel
Ed. 08.17 3–1

RCSE 443 RMMC
Operation Description and Operation
3.2.2 Switching Off the RCSE/REU
– AC power supply: The mains switch of the AC supply is located on the rear. Set the switch to '0'
(lower position). The control LED of AC converter and the Life LED of SIB inside are off (see Fig.
3‐1).
– DC power supply: The ON/OFF switch of the DC supply is located on the rear side. Set the switch
to 'OFF' (lower position). The control LED of DC converter and the Life LED of SIB inside are off
(see Fig. 3‐1).
3.2.3 General Controls of the INC

Only one button may be pushed simultaneoulsy. Otherwise misinterpretations could be the conse
quence. Each button command will be acknowledged with a beep from the buzzer. Should a button
command not be acknowledged, this could have one of the following reasons:
1) Button is not allowed in the current mode; 2) Interval between two button commands is too short;
3) Processing of the last button command has not been finished yet.
3.2.3.1 Lamp Test

As long as the button LAMP TEST is pushed, the lamp test is activated: All indicators are on and the
LED text fields indicate 'TEST'. The buzzer is also activated. If a station has been selected before the
lamp test, it remains selected and the request of selected state telegrams runs in the background.
3.2.3.2 Alarm Silent

The device buzzer sounds whenever the status of a station indicated on the device changes. This is
only provided in the DATA COM, MAINTENANCE, NORMAL, WARNING and ALARM states. The buzz
er remains switched on until the SIL button is pushed or the time preset (15 s) for it elapses.
NOTE: For maintenance purposes it is possible to switch off the buzzer permanently (as long as
RCSE is power supplied). This can be done on the INC panel as follows:
– Activate brightness mode (SIL–LAMP TEST–SIL–LAMP TEST, see section 3.2.3.3).
– Push the most right SELECT button on the INC panel shortly (see section 3.2.4).
– Leave the brightness mode again (by pushing the SIL button), then the buzzer is
switched off.
– The buzzer can be switched on again by pushing the LAMP TEST button.
A station status change does not result in a buzzer alarm in the following situations:
– If either the PC control or the switch control has been set for the station.
– If the runway select bit for the runway to which the station belongs has been altered during the
previous 60 seconds.
– If the ADRACS maintenance function (PC) is active.
3.2.3.3 Brightness up/Brightness down
The brightness of the LED text fields and the status indicators can be adapted to the ambient bright
ness:
- To activate the brightness control, push the control buttons SIL and LAMP TEST within 5 s in the
following sequence: SIL – LAMP TEST – SIL – LAMP TEST. All LED indicators are illuminated,
the text fields indicate alternatingly 'Brig' and 'htne' (for 'Brightness').
- To decrease or increase the brightness, push the control button EQUIP ON/OFF for the text fields
or CHANGE OVER for the status indicators. The setting is finished automatically after 5 s, if no
correspondent control button is pushed or pushing the button SIL or LAMP TEST.
3–2 Ed. 08.17

Fig. 3‐2
Ed. 08.17
RMMC
4 character text field
EQUIPMENT RC
Description and Operation
INC panel of RCSE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MON 1 MON 2 TX 1 TX 2 OPERATION
AERIAL AERIAL ON ON
WARNING
STANDBY STANDBY WARNING WARNING

ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM DATA COM
FAULTY FAULTY FAULTY FAULTY

BYPASSED BYPASSED ON ANT ON ANT

CONTROL STATION
DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM DATA COM
ENGAGED MAINS OFF
SIL
MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN MAINTEN
ENABLED ENV ALRM
COMMAND
ANT FTY
SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT EQUIP CHANGE REQUEST
SELECT SELECT SELECT LAMP
ON/OFF OVER RELEASE
OTHER TEST
WARN
RCSE Indication and Control panel (INC)
3–3
Operation
RCSE 443
RCSE 443 RMMC
3.2.4 Special Controls of the INC Panel
Selecting a station with the SELECT button

To each of the eight displayable stations, a SELECT button is assigned. This row can be found at the
bottom of the INC panel. After pushing a SELECT button, the respective <station name> text display
is blinking in order to indicate the selected station or the 'Mainten'–display is blinking (which can be
configured with the *.sit file). The selected station can then be controlled with the control buttons in
the INC area 'EQUIPMENT – DETAILED STATUS – COMMAND'. The blinking behavior of the LED text
display (and some other INC display areas) can be configured with the ADRACS configuration tool
named 'RMMC Configuration' (see section 3.2.5).
Working in the 'Local mode'

The INC can only send commands to the selected station when the 'Local mode' is active, indicated
by the green 'ENABLED' field in the INC area 'EQUIPMENT – DETAILED STATUS – CONTROL'.
If necessary, activate the 'Local mode' by pushing the control button REQUEST RELEASE.
Available control buttons:
– CHANGE OVER: Changes the aerial transmitter connected to the antenna.
– EQUIP ON/OFF: Switches the transmitters TX1 and TX2 of the LLZ and GP on/off .
3.2.5 Configuration Options of INC Panel Behavior

The INC panel's default behavior (e.g. station name, WARNING, MAINTEN, buzzer) can be config
ured within the *.sit configuration file. The 'RMMC Configuration' tool, which is available within the
ADRACS user program, enables the operator to configure it.
Fig. 3‐3 INC panel configuration with the RMMC configuration tool
3–4 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Configuring the LED text display on the INC panel

1. Start ADRACS and login with user level >= 2
2. Click the button 'Control' in the main status window. The menu bar 'RC Management' appears
3. Select the function 'Config' in the menu bar 'RC Management' to open the window 'RMMC
Configuration'
4. Select the function 'Open Config' in the menu 'File' to open the dialog window 'Open'
5. Select and open the desired configuration file (*.sit) in the corresponding directory. The dialog
window 'Config of ...' opens showing the tab 'System' as default
6. Click the button 'Additional' to open the dialog window 'Additional System Parameters', where
'INC Panel–Configuration' can be found in the lower section (see Fig. 3‐3)
7. Tick the parameters 'Station Name flashing on station panel select' and/or 'Maintenance flashing
on Maintenance' (examples) in order to set the desired INC behavior
8. Click 'OK' to save and close the dialog window 'Additional System Parameters'
9. Click 'SAVE' and 'CANCEL' to save and shut down the dialog window 'Config of ...'
10. Close the configuration tool 'RMMC Configuration' and log out from ADRACS.
3.2.5.1 Subsystem Indications
See Fig. 3‐2 and sections 1.4.3.3 and 1.4.3.5.
Station name display: The INC panel provides eight columns to indicate the state of the correspon
dent subsystem/station. The station indications are only provided on the panel when they have been
configured in the REU. On top of each subsystem column, a text field (LED dot matrix) is located with
four characters to indicate the station name. While the RCSE is switched on and configured, the con
nected station name is indicated; derived from the configuration file. Because this name consists of
up to eight characters, the name is shown 1 s each alternating the first four and the last four charac
ters. The displayed LED text of the station name can be modified using the RMMC configuration tool's
tab 'Stations' analog to above description. The text fields of columns, to which no station correspond,
are off. If no station is assigned/configured to the eight columns, the most right text field shows 'No'
and 'Stat'.
The following signals are evaluated by the REU and indicated by the INC accordingly:
V INC subsystem indications (INC area 'EQUIPMENT– MAIN STATUS')
ALARM => Station status = ALARM
WARNING => Station status = WARNING
NORMAL => Station status = NORMAL
DATA COM => Modem link to station (CTU only)
MAINTEN => Station status = Maintenance/BITE warning
Remote access or Local access
V INC indications if station selected (INC area 'EQUIPMENT– DETAILED STATUS')
MON1/2 AERIAL => No operational monitor ALARM
MON1/2 STANDBY => Standby Warning
MON1/2 FAULTY => Monitor FAULT set
MON1/2 BYPASSED => Monitor bypass set
TX1/2 ON => Transmitter x = ON
TX1/2 WARNING => Transmitter x has BITE WARNING
TX1/2 FAULTY => Transmitter x has operational OFF (faulty)
TX1/2 ON ANT => Transmitter x = aerial (connected to antenna)
Ed. 08.17 3–5

RCSE 443 RMMC
ENGAGED => Remote mode (control by ADRACS on PC)

ENABLED => Local mode (control by INC panel keys)
MAINS OFF => Mains power supply of the station is switched off
ENV ALRM => Communication to the selected station is faulty
ANT FTY => not used
OTHER WARN => Miscellaneous communication and protocol errors
3.2.5.2 System (RCSE) Indications

This section describes the system indications, which show the status of the RCSE equipment itself.
V RCSE (RC) status indication (INC area 'EQUIPMENT – RC')

OPERATION => Normal operation (Power ON)
WARNING => REU BITE warning
DATA COM => Internal communication fault
A data communication error is indicated if command telegrams
are not followed by correct message telegrams.
Read more about this message in section 4.4.3.
3–6 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
3.2.6 Assignment of Station Main Status Indications

This section interprets the meaning of the main status indications for the respective connected sta
tions. The meaning is shown as a logical OR–combination.
– GP, LLZ–Main Status:
ALARM Alarm or Monitor–Bypass
WARNING Mains–Off or Single–Monitoring or Standby–Alarm or TX–Off or TX–Operational–Off
MAINTEN BITE–Alarm or Local–Control or Mains–Off
– Marker Main Status
ALARM Alarm
WARNING Mains–Off or (not Master–Off) or Standby–Alarm
MAINTEN Mains–Off
– FFM–Main Status
WARNING Mains–Off or Single–Monitoring
MAINTEN BITE–Alarm or Mains–Off
– DME Main Status (DME 415)
ALARM Beacon–Faulty or (not Beacon–Operation)
WARNING Battery–On or Beacon–Degraded or TX1 Shut–Down or TX2 Shut–Down
MAINTEN Battery–On
– DME–Main Status (FSD10/15 only)
ALARM Beacon–Faulty or (not Beacon–Operation)
WARNING Battery–On or (not Beacon–Operation) or TX1 Shut–Down or
TX2 Shut–Down or Second Alarm Monitor 1 or Second Alarm Monitor 2
MAINTEN Battery–On
– NDB–Main Status
ALARM Alarm
WARNING Mains–Off or Standby–Alarm or SWR–Alarm
MAINTEN Mains–Off
– VOR–Main Status
WARNING Mains–Off or Single–Monitoring or TX–Operational–Off
MAINTEN Alarm–Memory or BITE–Alarm or Mains–Off
– Additional linkages of Main Status in the REU–Software
DATA–COM (not Data–Com–Error)
ALARM ALARM or Data–Com–Error
MAINTEN (MAINTENANCE and (not Data–Com–Error) or Face–Link–Active or PC–Maintenance
WARNING WARNING and (not ALARM)
NORMAL (not WARNING) and (not ALARM)
Ed. 08.17 3–7

RCSE 443 RMMC
3.2.7 Indications and Switches of the REU Subassemblies
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PC2
Processor Board
PC1
OIO1 / ADC*
LGM9600H1**
LGM Ext.**
LGM28.8**
LGM28.8**
OIO2 *
OIO3 *
MPX
ZUA
NFK
SIB
* optional ** different configurations of LGMx slots DC/DC Converter

possible (see fig. 1-8)
1 SIB: upper LED is life LED (green, blinking) Life on/off

Switch (not used)
2 LGM28.8: switched line modems (LGM1/2)

PM1 = State of interface line PM1, ON: test condition PM1 ANS
ANS = Indication of time slot, blinking: modem is seizing a line M5 S1
M5 = State of interface line M5, ON: transmission mode
S1 = State of interface line S1, ON: DTE ready for operation
3 LGM: switch test
4 LGM9600H1: dedicated line modem (LGM3/4)

PM1 = State of interface line PM1, ON: test condition PM1 ANS
ANS = Indication of time slot, blinking: modem is seizing a line M1 S1
M1 = State of interface line M1, ON: modem ready for operation
S1 = State of interface line S1, ON: DTE ready for operation
5 LGM Extender 2 Unit: optional instead of LGM4 for RS232/422 connections

PM1 M5
signal levels of RS232 lines (DCD, RXD, TXD, DTR, DSR, RTS, CTS, RI):
M2 S2
red LED on (back row: V1, V3, V6, V7, V10, V11, V14, v15): signal level is +12V
green LED on (front row: V2, V4, V5, V8, V9, V12, V13, V16): signal level is –12V
LEDs off (both rows): signal level is 0V
LGM1200MD: optional (instead of ZUA/NFK) in LGMx slot (LGM4 preferred)
PM1 = test condition
M5 = receive signal level
M2 = ready for transmission
S2 = switch on transmission part, DSK (permanent transmission control) on/off
6 ZUA: LED top = Activity data lines (RxD/TxD) RxD TxD

LED down = Receive level F11/F21 F11 F21
F2 F1
7 NFK: LED on = Channel switched off F4 F3
F6 F5
8 Multiplexer RS232: LEDs for input channels TXD (red), RXD (green);
6 output channels (yellow), LED off means connected through
9 DC/DC converter: LED on= Voltages +5, +12, –12 [V] available.
Fig. 3‐4 REU interior, indications and switches, example
3–8 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
3.2.8 Connectors and Indicators of the 28.8 DL Modem ( Mod IC )
Fig. 3‐5 Connectors and Indicators of the 28.8 DL Modem ( Mod IC )
D1 State of interface line D1

DTE transmits data
Modem transmits data to DTE
ANS Indicates channel allocation
M5 State of interface line M5
Opposite carrier is recognized
S1 State of interface line S1
DTE operational
Modem is ready
TEST Data/Test button
LINE FKS8 jack
Telephone access jack for dialing operation or 2-wire leased line operation
Fig. 3‐6 Meaning of Indicator Signals and FKS8 jack of the 28.8 DL Modem ( Mod IC )
Ed. 08.17 3–9

RCSE 443 RMMC
3.2.9 Operation and Indications of a GPS Real–Time Clock (optional)

An external GPS real–time clock can be connected optionally to the RCSE, in order to synchronise
all time stamps throughout the RMMC system. All system status information can be identified by a
definite time.
The GPS clock module, connected to the RCSE as described in section 2.3.5, is in service as soon
as the RCSE is switched on and initialized. The LED at the GPS clock module is lit to show operation
(see Fig. 3‐7).
LED indicator
fixing magnet
Fig. 3‐7 GPS clock module, LED indicator and fixing magnet
The GPS clock information data is indicated using the PC User Program ADRACS (see Fig. 3‐8). To
open the GPS status information window select the system 'GPSclock' in the ADRACS main status
window. The 'RPU Panel' appears and shows the relevant GPS clock information data:
1. line: Location of GPS clock
2. line: Actual date and time
3. line: Position coordinates
The status of the GPS clock module shall be NORMAL for correct operation. The status indicates
MAINT in addition, if the signal of the GPS clock module is missing (i.e. no GPS reception, no power
supply, or faulty line connection).
RC THALES ATM - NAVAIDS - X
RPU Panel
VOR DME VORname>

<site OIO GPSclock GPSclock
11.10.2007 09:06:12d
ALARM 4849.5682N00906.616E
NORMAL
NORMAL NORMAL
MAINT
select MON 1
select MONselect
2 TX 1 TX 2 select
Login Logout Logout Logout
Login
AREAL Logout
AREAL Site: XXX-SITE
Logout
AREAL Logout
AREAL
REU-Software Ver.: 2.58
STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY STANDBY
Actual Login Level 5
BYPASS BYPASS BYPASS BYPASS
NORMAL
Login Exit Control
CHANGE OFF OFF
CLOSE
AERIAL
Fig. 3‐8 ADRACS window with GPS clock module indication (example)
3–10 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
3.3 MAINTENANCE OPERATION

3.3.1 General
The maintenance mode can be set either using a Maintenance Data Terminal (PC/Laptop) connected
to the RCSE/REU or at a Remote Maintenance Center (RMC), again via a PC which is connected there
to the RCSE/REU. In both cases, it is controlled using the installed PC user program ADRACS.
Since the interface in the REU system is an open interface, the access and thus operator actions are
governed by a multi–level password code. When the ADRACS program is started, password informa
tion is sent to the REU. The first PC with a suitable password level (> 2, i.e. maintenance allowed)
to issue a request is given priority over the next requesting PC with the same password level. In other
words, only one PC at a time can be operated in maintenance mode in the same system (either locally
or at the RMC). The other PCs receive a message 'Other User is master'. All PCs with a password
level < 3 will get access to the system. The only exception is a request for GetAllState data (telegram
for main status of station), which can be made by several different PCs.
NOTE: To avoid bringing in a computer virus it is not allowed to run computer games generally
and to use software programs which are not authorized on the Maintenance Data Terminal
(PC). It is recommended to test the computer or disks with a virus checker.
3.3.2 Operation with a Maintenance Data Terminal (PC)
The Maintenance Data Terminal (PC/Laptop) is ready as soon as the REU (1a2 PC1) has been con
nected and the ADRACS software has been installed. When the PC is switched on and the ADRACS
software is started, the REU software realizes that a PC is connected and that it can communicate
with it. The PC can also be connected at any time during normal operation.
The Maintenance Data Terminal can control and poll the REU and the connected stations via this inter
face, and if necessary program them using the facilities of the ADRACS program. The control func
tions of the user program are described in the Technical Manual ADRACS, ref. no. 83140 55324.
3.3.3 Operation at the Remote Maintenance Center (RMC)
It is possible to poll several systems (with local RCSEs) via the telephone network (PTT), using the
PC of the RMC, and to set them to maintenance mode. Only the general status of an airport or of sever
al en–route systems can be displayed on the INC of the RCSE in the RMC. The subsystem SELECT
buttons on the INC are not active. The software of the RCSE/REU in the RMC has been designed
accordingly.
The Maintenance Data Terminal (PC) in the RMC can control and poll the connected stations via the
REU, and if necessary program them using the facilities of the ADRACS program. The control func
tions of the user program are described in the Technical Manual ADRACS, ref. no. 83140 55324. The
priorities described in section 3.3.1 apply.
Ed. 08.17 3–11

RCSE 443 RMMC
3–12 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Detailed Description
CHAPTER 4
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
4.1 GENERAL
All plug–in or screw–on subassemblies (printed circuit boards) in the RCSE 443 are described in sec
tion 4.3. Their tasks are described and illustrated with the aid of simplified block diagrams. The inte
gration within the complete system is shown in block diagram Fig. 1‐18.
More details about the subassemblies (printed circuit boards) exceeding the information given here
in chapter 4, can be taken from the circuit diagrams listed in the table below (Fig. 4‐1).
4.2 OVERVIEW OF RCSE SUBASSEMBLIES
SUBASSEMBLY ASSIGNMENT PART NUMBER1) REFERENCE

REU subassemblies:
Processor board with Ethernet Controller (ETX–CPU) 84045 841023) 4.3.1/2.3.4
Serial Interface Board (SIB) 84045 831073) 4.3.2
Opto–Isolated Input/Output board (OIO) 84045 83xxx2) 4.3.3
Modems:
Modem, switched line (obsolete 2014) (LGM 28.8) 84045 83248 4.3.5.1
Modem, switched l. (new model, SW V1.25) (LGM 28.8DL) 84045 83251 4.3.5.2
Modem, switched line, ISDN (LGM 64K) 84045 83233 4.3.5.3
Modem, dedicated line (LGM 1200MD) 84045 83260 4.3.5.5
Modem, dedicated line (LGM 9600H1) 84045 83904 4.3.5.6
LGM Extender 2 Unit (LGM Ext) 57200 04405 4.3.5.7
Modem, dedicated line (ZU1) 83131 72601 4.3.7
Modem, dedicated line (ZUA29) 75864 81410 4.3.8
Star distributor (NFK29–1) 84045 83800 4.3.9
Multiplexer RS232 (MPX) 4.3.10
Power supply: 4.3.11

AC/DC converter (Puls AP346) 84045 82350 4.3.11.1.1
DC/DC converter 120 W, 18–36 V (Puls APD346) 84045 79700 4.3.11.2.1
DC/DC converter 60 W, 36–72 V (Puls APD346) 84045 79850 4.3.11.2.1
(until 2008)
DC/DC converter 60 W, 40–80 V (MGV‐DG37‐05121‐3G) 84045 79851 4.3.11.2.2
(since 2009)
Indication panel:
INC panel (RCSE 443 panel unit) (INC) 84045 80602 4.3.12
Adapter plate (INC–LPT) 84045 82250
Doubled INC panel (enlargement kit) 84045 80130
1) The part numbers given may differ to those of the delivered installation in individual cases. In such cases, the actual part
number can be taken from the delivery list of the installation or the drawing set.
2) Part number of the OIO board depends on the configuration (input/output and voltage range).
3) Part numbers of the ETX–CPU and SIB boards depend on configuration of the multi‐IRQ function (see section 2.3.2.2)
and the notes regarding compatibility (see 4.3.1.1).
4) An optional modification kit for the use of a 5th modem is available.
Fig. 4‐1 List of RCSE 443 subassemblies
Ed. 08.17 4‐1

RCSE 443 RMMC
Detailed Description Description and Operation
4.3 REU–SUBASSEMBLIES
4.3.1 Processor Board ETX–CPU
The processor board ETX–CPU includes an integrated flash disk divided into two partitions (drives
c: and d:). The flash disk (up to 1 GB) operates like a hard disk and is partitioned into drive c: (up to
32 MB) and drive d:. The configuration files *.sit and *.oio and the data files (e.g. for history data) are
stored on drive d:. Drive c: contains the DR–DOS 7.03 operating system software and the REU appli
cation program. The optional single–board computer is built up entirely in high–speed CMOS technol
ogy and is integrated on a simple Eurocard. The processor board is providing an Ethernet controller
interface. This allows the REU to be linked up to a thin wire ethernet LAN.
The processor board accommodates 1 GB (as a standard) dynamic read/write memory (DRAM), op
tional max. 4 GB. The CPU socket is equipped with a AMD Geode(r) LX 800@500 MHz CPU.
A battery–backed real–time clock (RTC) holds time, date and a wake–up time. In case of a supply
power breakdown, the 3 V battery ensures the further RTC operation. The battery supply voltage can
be interrupted by opening jumper X17, especially before long down–time periods (e.g. for storage).
In case of data loss or wrong data of configuration files or REU application program a special AUTO
BOOT.BAT file is installed on the flash disk, which deletes the certain incorrect, wrong data on the disk
depending on the used type of dongle (adapter) connected to the PC2 interface at the REU. After dele
tion, the default application program is started to reconfigure the processor board (see also section
2.4.3).
Cold–booting the processor leads to a reset of the CPU, of the entire on–board peripherals and of
all subassemblies connected via ISA 96 bus. It is initiated by the 'watchdog time–out' function, which
monitors the program execution in the microprocessor (monitoring of read access, which must be
executed at least every 1.6 seconds).
CPU DDR
Geode LX SDRAM
Flash Disk Socket Processor
(sec. master)
PCI/SATA
SATA connect. 1+2 Controller
connector X1
IDE secondary PCI BUS

connector X4
100BaseT
Ethernet X20 Ethernet X14 USB
Controller L
X51 Audio AF
X52
R
Hard Disk
Interface Companion
IDE primary IDE pri. VG connector
EEPROM Chip 96 pin
I2C Setup
Data CSS5636
USB 2.0 USB
CRT Audio Sound Codec
connector X2
connector X3
Floppy
Parallel X7 I/O ISA-Bus
LPT
VGA X11 Controller LPC Bus LPC/ISA ISA BUS
Keyboard X10 Mouse Bridge
Watchdog RTC
COM1 X12
Key-
COM2 X13 board
BIOS
COM1 flash memory a bc
XT AT XT
COM2 CPU Board
COM3 X8 COM3 Serial Battery Watchdog

Controller 3V Battery contr.
PAL
COM4 X9 D6 Fitmware
COM4
D4
CLK
Connector board
Fig. 4‐2 Processor board ETX–CPU, block diagram
4‐2 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
4.3.1.1 Compatibility
To achieve the specified functions, a compatible combination of ETX–CPU with SIB has to be selected
and the hardware settings described in section 2.3.2 have to be applied on selected boards.
ETX–CPU SIB RCSE Compatible /

Software Multi–IRQ function
Version available
ETX–CPU LX8 Multi–IRQ board with SIB board 3.0 Yes / Yes
P/N 84045 84102 P/N 84045 83107 or higher
with or without serial controller D6
ETX–CPU LX8 Multi–IRQ board with SIB board 2.32 Yes / No
P/N 84045 84102 P/N 84045 83100 or higher
only without serial controller D6 P/N 84045 83105
P/N 84045 83106
ETX–CPU processor board with SIB board 2.32 Not recommended.
P/N 84045 84100 P/N 84045 83107 or higher
P/N 84045 84101
only without serial controller D6
ETX–CPU processor board with SIB board 2.32 Yes / No
P/N 84045 84100 P/N 84045 83100 or higher
P/N 84045 84101 P/N 84045 83105
only without serial controller D6 P/N 84045 83106
Fig. 4‐3 Compatibility of ETX–CPU with SIB boards
4.3.1.2 Ethernet– and USB Interfaces

Ethernet interface (LAN)
The ETX–CPU processor board is equipped with an optional ethernet controller which allows the REU
to be linked up to a thin–wire ethernet network (LAN) via the interface 10/100 Base–T twisted pair,
RJ45. The voltage (+5 V) necessary for operation is supplied from the PCI–bus via the VG connector.
The RJ45 interface is situated on the ETX–CPU processor board and is also provided on the RCSE
back panel (connector in the LAN opening) by using a socket–to–socket adapter. The used network
connector type there is RJ45 female. See also section 2.3.4.
USB interfaces (inactive)

The standard PC host controller V2.0 is connected to X14. However, the two USB interfaces are not
supported by the RCSE software in this application.
4.3.1.3 ETX-LX Board, SO-DDR-DIMM 256 MB, CF 4GB with Image

This module with P/N 84045 84125 will be delivered with following sub parts:
S P/N 52397 28258 MAIN BOARD, ETX-LX 800, 500 MHz, 16BIT ISA I/O
S P/N 52397 28252 DDR-SDRAM SODIMM PC2700 MEMORY MODULE WITH 256 MB
S P/N 52397 28257 COMPACT FLASH CARD 4 GB WITH IMAGE FOR RCSE
Ed. 08.17 4‐3

RCSE 443 RMMC
4.3.2 SIB
The SIB (Serial Interface Board) is employed in the REU for the implementation of asynchronous, syn
chronous and parallel communication channels. The INTEL controllers which are used are PC–soft
ware compatible in order to allow compatibility for the entire system of the REU, which employs an
industry PC in Eurocard format as the central unit. The bus on which the card is located is the ISA96
bus. All communication connections are implemented through the connector back panel (CBP). All
the settings for interrupt assignment, base address assignment, signal specification and polling logic
are realized on the card with jumpers. A maximum of 10 (only if Multi–IRQ) asynchronous channels
and 4 synchronous channels can be realized in one system.
The bus drivers/receivers serve for bus coupling and buffering for the ISA96 bus. The PAL prepro
cesses the necessary chip–select signals, preprocesses the RD and WR signals and makes the selec
tion signals available for data/control words. In addition, it makes the signals available for the .bis mat
ching circuit and preprocesses the controls for the 8–bit parallel I/O processing.
The communication controllers are operated with the buffered system bus and supplied by the TTL
clock with a basic frequency of 18.432 MHz. The controllers preprocess their baud rate from this basic
frequency. The primary requirement for the synchronous communication controller (82530) is the
maintenance of the recovery time between two read/write processes. This time is summed with a
counter. In case the recovery time has not elapsed before the next read/write command, an I/O exten
sion is initiated. In addition, two WAIT STATES are inserted with each read/write process.
Interface modules serve to convert the TTL outputs of the controllers to the desired level, which are:
– Asynchronous controller 1 (NS 16552) fixed at RS422
– Asynchronous controller 2 (NS 16552) fixed at RS232
– Asynchronous controller 3 (NS 16552 ) optional at TTL level or RS232 or RS422
– Synchronous controller 1 (82530) optional at TTL level or RS232
– Synchronous controller 2 (82530) optional at TTL level or RS422; TTL fixed
Chipselect PAL
IRQ Logic
Oscillation Selection
Base address
I/O,R/W Conditioning
Waitstates sync.
Bus: Data, addresses, CS-x, INT-x, WR, RD, reset, oscillation

Bus
X1 Buffer
PC-Bus
ISA-96
Front panel 8 bit 8 bit Asynchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous Synchronous Synchronous

parallel parallel controller 1 controller 2 controller 3 controller 1 controller 2
out in DMA
1 2 1 2 1 2 A B A B
Life
Local
(NFK7...12, AUX IN 1...7)
Local
(NFK1...6, AUX OUT1)
RS422
RS422
RS232
RS232
TTL
PC2
RS232
RS422
RS232
RS422
RS232
RS232
RS422
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
TTL
PC1
IN/OUT 1a1 2a1 1a2 2a2 1a3 2a3 1sA 1sB 2sA 2sB
Connector Back Panel
Fig. 4‐4 SIB, block diagram
4‐4 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Asynchronous channels
The existing controllers may assign interrupt lines independently (normal state). However, they may
also jointly poll interrupt lines. Jumpers serve for setting the interrupt line assignment, selection be
tween XT and AT interrupts, the signal specification for channel 3. For the utilization of one of the inter
rupts IRQ 10, 11, or 12, it is necessary for a PC–AT to be available as the central unit.
Synchronous channels
The interface modules serve to convert the TTL outputs of the controller to the desired level, whereby
channel A and channel B may be offered optionally on the TTL level or on the RS232 level. The com
munications controller is polled with the buffered system bus and provided with the basic frequency
through the TTL clock. The controller can preprocess its baud rate from this basic frequency.
The setting of the interrupt–request channel, whereby only one channel may be plugged at any time,
and the channel selection for the DMA operation is made by jumpers. For the utilization of one of the
interrupts IRQ 12, 14, or 15, it is necessary for a PC–AT to be available as the central unit.
Ed. 08.17 4‐5

RCSE 443 RMMC
4.3.3 OIO (optional)
The optional OIO board is used in the REU to connect IN or OUT control signals from/to external
equipment. It provides 32 decoupled inputs and outputs by means of optocouplers. The OIO is con
trolled by In/Out commands. 4 I/O addresses are used, which can be set with jumpers (J3) in steps
of four starting from a fixed base address. On default it is set to 0230H to 0233H. The OIO consists
of the following functional groups:
– Completely buffered and decoded processor bus interface
– Four eightfold tristate line driver circuits
– Four 8 bit registers with tristate outputs
– 32 optocouplers used for potential isolation (e.g. 16 inputs, 16 outputs)
OIO 84045 83550 OIO 84045 83301

Input current for logical 0 1 mA 2 mA
Input current for logical 1 10 mA 3 mA
Voltage for logical 0 – 1.5 V
Voltage for logical 1 – 4 V
Max. output current 150 mA 80 mA
Output; max. operation voltage 35 V 35 V
Output; P max. 150 mV 150 mW
INPUTS
The voltage of the IN–signal is adjustable by changing the input resistor of the respective optocoupler
(factory adjustment). Forward and feedback lines of the inputs are fed separately to connector J1.
The inputs are protected by antiparallel connected diodes. Interference pulses are suppressed by
RC–filters in the signal path.
OUTPUTS
Forward and feedback lines of the outputs are fed separately to connector J1. The outputs are pro
tected by antiparallel connected Z diodes. Switch–over time is approx. 100 ms depending on the used
pull–up resistor. During/after a system reset all outputs are at the same potential because the opto
couplers are not conductive. The definition of the outputs and the associated levels is set by the initiali
zation program.
4.3.4 ADC (optional)

The optional ADC board enables up to 16 single–ended channels and up to 8 double–ended channels
to be coupled to analog signals converted to digital signals by the 13–bit A/D converter.
4‐6 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
4.3.5 Modems LGM

4.3.5.1 LGM28.8 DL MOD-IC (new model, since 2015)
4.3.5.1.1 Product Description
Mod IC has been designed for data transmission on analog lines. It works in dialing operation as well
as in line operation. The asynchronous data traffic takes place in duplex mode and enables transfer
rates referred to ITU - T recommendations V.34, V.32bis, V.32, V.23 dx, V.22bis, V.22 or rather V.21,
from 300 to 28,800 bit/s. The internal protocols of the modem ensure an exact transmission of your
data, even under rough industrial conditions.
The Mod IC is capable of remote configuration. The modem can be adjusted remotely e.g. from a
central control. For this purpose a connection to the modem will be set up and, subsequently, the
remote configuration is launched with password protection. An extra protection against unauthorized
access is integrated.
Software configuration is performed using AT - commands as well as DIP switches. The operation
modes referred to ITU-T V.34, V.32bis, V.32, V.22bis, V.22 and V.21 have implemented the data protec
tion protocols according to V.42. These modes allow for reliable data transmission between two termi
nal devices.
Busy detection
Modem
Controller
Data key
Detection
Telephone
Fig. 4‐5 Mod IC LGM28.8DL, block diagram, connection to TAE6NF socket (Dial Line Oper.)
Ed. 08.17 4‐7

RCSE 443 RMMC
Safety aspects are taken into consideration starting with the dial up. If password protection is acti
vated, any caller is only put through to the terminal equipment (i.e. a host) after typing the correct
password. With an additional callback number a connection is terminated after the correct password
has been transferred and the modem dials the callback number. A connection to a host is only
switched when the connection has been established successfully during the callback procedure. The
modems even cooperate with terminal equipment that might not be able to transfer dial commands.
The operation mode “direct call“ allows for dialing of a predefined calling number just by switching
the control line S1/DTR from OFF to ON or by activating the Test-Button.
As a further feature the modems are designed for remote configuration as direct or local modem con
figuration is not possible with some applications, i.e. a terminal is not available or the operation mode
of different remote modems has to be altered. Mod IC even allows for reconfiguration during an exist
ing connection.
Three operation modes are available for different modem applications. During software mode, all mo
dem configurations are performed using AT-commands. After dial-up, data transmission is per
formed according to the selected asynchronous modulation procedure.
Compatible mode is employed to emulate duplex operation mode for existing recent modems. In this
case, the necessary modem is selected using the DIP switches. The other modem DIP switches cor
respond to the switches of the modem to be replaced. For this reason a terminal is not necessary for
modem configuration.
For further information, refer to the COTS manual [01].
4.3.5.1.2 Connectors and Indicators

• DTE transmits data
• Modem transmits data to DTE
ANS Indicates channel allocation
• Opposite carrier is recognized
S1 State of interface line S1
• DTE operational
• Modem is ready
TEST Data / Test Button
LINE FKS8 jack
• telephone access jack for dialing operation or 2 - wire leased line operation
Fig. 4‐6 Mod IC LGM28.8DL connectors and indicators
4‐8 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
4.3.5.2 LGM28.8 D1 (obsolete since 2014)

The LGM 28.8 D1 high speed modem for duplex operation supports all common duplex modulation
procedures.
La Busy detection
a2
Lb
Modem controller
b2
Data key detection

Ringing tone
detection
G
E
Setting
Fig. 4‐7 LGM28.8 D1, block diagram

The modem is designed for synchronous as well as for asynchronous data transmission according
to the following CCITT modulation modes: V.34, V.32bis, V.32, V.22bis, V.22, and V.21, which have im
plemented the data securing procedures according to V.42 and MNP4. Data compressing to increase
the baud rate is implemented according to V.42bis and MNP5. These procedures enable a practical
fault free transmission between two data terminal equipment (DTE) units. Depending on the proce
dure the transmission rate can be increased up to 38400 Bd (autobaud) using V.42bis and the AT
–mode/reliable mode. The modem can also communicate with modems from other vendors at the
same transmission rates, providing these modems comply with CCITT recommendations V.22 and
V.22bis.
Software configuration is possible using AT or DNL commands while hardware configuration is per
formed employing the DIP switches located at the bottom and on one side of the module. It is de
signed for operation in public switched networks and consequently equipped with an integrated auto
matic dialing facility (IAWD). Data connections can however also be set up by the subscriber dialing
manually and pushing the data key. Point–to–point operation on dedicated lines (leased or tie lines)
is likewise possible. Almost all the modem functions can be set by the data terminal equipment (DTE)
using a command set in accordance with CCITT Recommendation V.25bis. The correct operation of
the microprocessor and the signal processors is monitored by an integrated circuit, which initiates
a 'master reset' if one of these processors malfunctions (watchdog).
A data connection can be set up by means of either the integrated automatic dialing facility or the
automatic call acceptance feature. It is also possible to dial out or to accept incoming calls manually.
No dialing takes place on dedicated lines.
All the V.25bis commands and messages are exchanged via the interfaces which are also used to
transfer the actual data. After a call request with identification, the LGM checks whether the subscriber
line is already busy, i.e. whether the subscriber is in the process of making a call. If not, the outside
line is seized. The LGM then transmits the dialed digits which have previously been transmitted by
the DTE. After the dialing procedure, an intermittent 1300 Hz tone is transmitted and the modem waits
for a constant 2100 Hz answer tone. As soon as this answer tone – which is transmitted by modems
with an automatic call acceptance facility – is identified, the two modems start the prolog (handshake).
Ed. 08.17 4‐9

RCSE 443 RMMC
A data connection can only be terminated by the DTE, unless there is no carrier for more than 250
ms/10 s. In this case, the line seizure is canceled by the LGM. Eighteen switches are provided on the
PC board for presetting the seven different operating modes, the four communication protocols and
various other parameters. A self–test is performed each time the modem is switched on. The default
setup is as follows: 2400 bd, V.22bis, dialing mode.
4.3.5.3 LGM64K (ISDN Modem)
The LGM 64K is an ISDN terminal adapter (module) in the Eurocard format for the use of public ISDN
switched lines and dedicated lines. In terms of hardware, the LGM64K is built up the same as the
LGM28.8, and the pins are compatible. It possesses the same operations set and the same definitions
for the DIP switches. In software, the module is configured through AT and V.25bis commands and
the hardware is configured through DIP switches.
The modem is connected to the line via the S0 terminal and can be operated using the implemented
D–Channel protocols 1TR6 and DSS1, both in the national and in the European ISDN network. One
B–Channel with 64 kbits/s is available for data transmission. Data transmission to the terminal device
may take place either synchronously or asynchronously via the serial interface (TTL level on the VG
bar). Matching the speed of the serial interface to the ISDN speed of 64 kbit/s is managed by the bit
rate adaptation according to ITU–T V.110. The LGM64K modem is remotely configurable.
4.3.5.4 Connection Setup

4.3.5.4.1 Connection Setup via Switched Circuits
Autodialing
'Autodialing' means that the connection is set up by the modem automatically. The desired telephone
number is transferred to the modem by means of a command. This dialing command can be pre
ceded by a command for setting the transmission parameters. The commands can be transferred
automatically with the desired data (transmission parameters and telephone number) by the commu
nication program. There is no action necessary done by the user.
4.3.5.5 Dedicated Line Modem LGM1200MD
The LGM1200MD is a universally applicable half duplex permanent line modem. The data transfer rate
is 1200 or 600 bit/s. The LGM 1200MD (MD=multidrop) is optimized for operation on permanent
two–wire lines in the so called party line mode. In this case, several modems are served by a control
station via one line only (polling mode). On replacement, the LGM1200MD is used in stations instead
of the ZUA29, on remote side instead of ZUA29 and NFK. It occupies one LGM slot.
The LGM1200MD operates in the voice band with FSK modulation, i.e. frequency shift keying in con
formity with V.23 at 1300 and 2100 Hz with up to 1200 bit/s and 1300 and 1700 Hz with up to 600 bit/s.
The data transfer method is half duplex or simplex. Generation of interfering trailing bits (on deactiva
tion of the remote transmitter) is largely excluded by process–controlled 'fast clamping' of the re
ceived data. In the asynchronous mode, data transfer from 0 to 1200 bit/s or 0 to 600 bit/s is possible,
independently of the code and speed.
4‐10 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
transmit path
Over-
voltage
protection Level
a2 adaptation TxA
La
Lb FSK signal
b2
E converter
Level
connection
Filter RxA
adaptation
2-wire line
receive path
TD
Microprocessor
RD
DIL switch TTL/V.24 interface
Set 1...14 Data in/out
Fig. 4‐8 Modem LGM1200MD, block diagram
A microcomputer controls and monitors all functions of the LGM. Parameters for the processor and
processor–independent circuitry can be influenced by means of 14 adjacent coding switches. A
power–on self–test is run. The LEDs indicate transmit and receive data activity or line seizure. The
connected trunk lines are accessible via an ISEP test socket on the front panel (for monitoring the
analog line signal).
When the TEST key on the front panel is pushed, the modem is switched to the 'close range analog
loop' (without transmitter) while the key is pushed. This is also active during the transmission phase
(the connection is then aborted).
In half duplex mode on two–wire connections, the participating data transmission equipment each
seizes the telephone line in succession. The respective DTE responsible for transmission controls
operation with the 105/S2/RTS (ready to send) signal. This activates the modem's carrier. The DTE
must only offer data to the modem via the 103/D1/TD line once a specific delay after ready to send
has elapsed and the modem has switched the 106/M2/CTS (clear to send). During the delay time be
tween the 'ready to send' 105/S2/RTS and 'clear to send' 106/M2/CTS signals, the signal detector
of the receiving modem will already react and will adapt the clock signals of the receiver to the clock
pulse of the incoming signals.
With the 109/M5/DCD (receive signal level) signal, the receiving modem indicates that it is capable
of forwarding received data (104/D2/RD). If the 109/M5/DCD (receive signal level) signal is not in the
ON state, the receive interface line (104/D2/RD) is in the 'I' state. A so–called fast clamping circuit is
integrated in the LGM1200MD to avoid trailing bits during reception. It is processor–controlled, with
the result that no more than 1 byte can occur as a trailing byte.
NOTE: When using the LGM1200MD the permanent line must be equipped with a termination
(600 Ohm/47 nF parallel) at the point where it ends (station and remote ends). The R/C
combination can be soldered onto the 9pin SubD connector together with the two–wire
line (see also section 2.2.2).
Ed. 08.17 4‐11

RCSE 443 RMMC
4.3.5.6 Dedicated Line Modem LGM9600H1

The LGM9600H1 is a universally applicable half duplex permanent line modem. The data transfer rate
is 1200 or 600 bit/s. It occupies one LGM slot.
The LGM9600H1 operates in the voice band with FSK modulation, i.e. frequency shift keying in con
formity with V.23 at 1300 and 2100 Hz with up to 1200 bit/s and 1300 and 1700 Hz with up to 600 bit/s.
The data transfer method is half duplex. Generation of interfering trailing bits (on deactivation of the
remote transmitter) is largely excluded by process–controlled 'fast clamping' of the received data. In
the asynchronous mode, data transfer from 0 to 1200 bit/s or 0 to 600 bit/s is possible, independently
of the code and speed. A microcomputer controls and monitors all functions of the LGM.
4.3.5.7 LGM Extender 2 Unit

The LGM Extender 2 Unit is an opto– and electrically isolated level converter. It is able to convert TTL
signals to RS232 resp. to RS422 signals and vice versa. The maximum data transfer rate is 38.4 kbit/s
(for RS232). The LGM Extender 2 Unit occupies one LGM slot and is normally plugged into LGM4 slot
of RCSE subrack.
The RS232 resp. RS422 outputs are led to CEPT plug outputs La, Lb, a2, b2, G, E, TXA, TXB, RXA,
RXB (CEPT plug X1, see Fig. 4‐9). The signals are connected to the pins of LGMx (x=1..4, preferred
4) as described in section 2.2.4.2. This signals are also led to plug X4, a conversion from Speedy 10
(X4) to DB 9 (LGMx connector) results in the same pin assignment than for LGMx connector. This is
not used for RCSE application.
Another Speedy 10 connector X3 is provided to the user for RS232 data test purposes, the signals
are not opto– and electrically isolated, the signal levels are indicated via LEDs (V1..V16).
All output signals can be inverted by setting the jumpers X20 to X27 on the LGM Extender board. The
terminal bars S1 and S2 are not used for RCSE connection (see also section 2.3.2.13).
LGM1..4
La, Lb, a2, b2, TxA, TxB, RxA, RxB, E, G
(SUBD 9)
at Back-
panel Electrical Isolation
+5V (+/-10%) +5V isolated (+5%,-2%)
GND -GND
DC/DC-Converter
Opto-Isolation Level Conversion

RS232
X1
X1
X30..37
TxD, RxD, RTS, CTS, DTR,, DSR, DCD, RI

TTL
SIB
RS422
TTL Optocoupler
Processor only for connection to
Board RS232 X4 DME via separate cable
then LGM1..4 port may
not be used.
(not used in RCSE)
X3 LEDs V1..V16
RS232 Data Test
RCSE LGM Extender 2 Unit
Fig. 4‐9 LGM Extender 2 Unit, block diagram
4‐12 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
4.3.6 Optional 5th Modem (Modification Kit)
An optional modem modification kit (ref. no. xxx) enables to establish a dualized connection from the
RCSE to a certain station using a 5th modem. For example, 'dualized connection' means that there
is one connection via a usual modem line connection and another additional connection via Radio
link from the RCSE to the same station. This modification can be realized in the AC/DC version as
well as with the DC/DC version of the RCSE.
4.3.7 Modem ZU1

Extension for additional lines
Quiescent tone Line External supply
Generator and Modulator disconnection Transmit filter Preamplifier Level setting disconnection
Output amplifier
IS7 IS8 IS6/4,1 IS6/2 IS11 IS6/3
RXD Receive Data
Local line RTS Request To Send
DTR Data Terminal Ready Line Remote line
RXD V.24 matching TR3
TXD Transmission Data
RTS DSR Data Set Ready
DTR
Receive enable Demodulator
TXD
TR2
IS10 IS4
Level monitoring Limiting amplifier Receive filter Receive preamplifier
DSR Line
disconnection
TTL IS3 IS2/2,1 IS1
Level conversion Extension for up to 14 additional lines
Fig. 4‐10 Modem ZU1, block diagram
The ZU1 is a voice frequency telegraphy facility (VFT) for transmitting digital signals on transmission
links with a frequency range between 300 Hz and 3.4 kHz, such as telephone lines. The modulation
method is frequency shift keying (FSK). The ZU1 can transmit data asynchronously in any code up
to a maximum telegraphic speed of 600 baud. The information which must be transmitted to the navi
gation station (voice frequency telegraphy signals) takes the form of commands and interrogations.
The center transmission frequency is 2760 Hz, with a frequency deviation of ±200 Hz. These signals
are converted into DC signals in the modem and supplied to the navigation station via a V.24 interface.
In the opposite direction, the information which must be transmitted to the remote control system –
status messages and acknowledgments – is offered to the V.24 interface of the ZU1 by the navigation
station in the form of DC signals. The modem converts the information into AC signals with a center
transmission frequency of 1320 Hz and a frequency deviation of ±200 Hz. The connection is imple
mented using a 2–wire line on which duplex operation is possible. The main functional units of the
ZU1 are the balanced–to–unbalanced transformer, the receive branch and the transmit branch.
The modulator IS7 converts the digital DC signals into AC signals. The frequency of an RC generator
is shift–keyed by a control signal. The modulator has a transmitter disconnection facility IS8, which
allows the sound to be switched on and off by remote control. The quiescent tone is switched off auto
matically if the control line is interrupted. The transmit filter is an active, 4th–order filter. It serves to
limit the frequency spectrum of the modulated signal. The gain of the filter can be set with jumpers
to ±0 dB, –3 dB, –6 dB or –9 dB. The transmit level is set approximately by a voltage divider, which
is decoupled from the transmit filter by means of a buffer preamplifier. The level can be reduced by
up to 30 dB in steps of 10 dB. The fine setting is made in steps of 3 dB using the transmit filter.
Ed. 08.17 4‐13

RCSE 443 RMMC
The line disconnection circuit IS11 isolates the transmitter and the receiver jointly from the trunk cir
cuit. The trunk circuit is disconnected automatically if the control line is interrupted. It is matched to
the ZU1 by a balanced–to–unbalanced transformer, and is therefore electrically isolated from it and
terminated with 600 W. Test sockets are provided on the front panel of the ZU1 for measuring the trans
mit and receive levels. The ZU1 is set to 4–wire operation in conjunction with the NFK.
The receive preamplifier IS2 has two stages. Its gain can be set to either 6 dB or 26 dB. The receive
filter is a 5–stage L/C filter with a band–pass characteristic. A limiting amplifier IS3 is connected to the
output of the receive filter. It amplifies the signal which has been attenuated by the receive filter, and
its limiting action prevents the downstream demodulator from being overdriven. This reduces the ef
fects of level fluctuations on the transmission path.
4.3.8 Modem ZUA29

The ZUA is an interface board for converting a V.24/V.28 (RS232C) or V.11 (RS422) interface to an FSK
signal (frequency shift keying) according to CCITT V.23 (half duplex operation).
The digital interface can be set to either V.24/V.28 or V.11. It is possible to connect transmission links
with a frequency range of 300 Hz to 3.4 kHz, and to transmit data asynchronously and code–transpar
ently up to a rate of 1200 baud. The information which must be transmitted (voice frequency telegra
phy signals) takes the form of commands and interrogations. The center transmission frequency at
1200 Bd (std setting) is 1700 Hz, with a frequ. deviation of ±400 Hz (i.e. fu=1300 Hz and fo=2100 Hz).
The connection is implemented using a 2–wire line. The received information (status messages and
acknowledgments) is converted into DC signals in the modem and supplied to the connected station
via the V.24 interface. In the opposite direction, the information (commands and interrogations) which
must be transmitted from the connected station are offered to the V.24 interface of the ZUA in the form
of DC signals. The modem converts this information into modulated AC signals.
In conjunction with the NFK, the ZUA29 is set to 4–wire operation, 1200 Bd, V.23.
Level
detector
PE1
S12 S13 S21
T101 T202
F11 D105 D102B D106 D201 D202A F22
S11 S11 S23 S22
F12 F21
T102 T201
D101 D102A D201 D206 D202B D205
F11, F12, F21, F22 AF–interfaces D303, MRTS Level

detector
PE2
S11 to S13 and S21 to S23 Control lines 301
LD A, LD B LED's
PE1, PE2 Test jack MRTS = Modem Request to Send
TCRST = Transmitter to Controller ReStart
FSK- Mode CTRS = Transmitter to Controller Request to Send
Watch- Signal converter LD A CTSD = Controller to Transmit Send Data
5V LD B
dog- Monitor (modem) TCRD = Transmitter to Controller Receive Data
Timer TCRR = Transmitter to Controller Receiver Ready
MDCD = Modem Data Carrier Detect
S11,S12
S13
Microcomputer V.24-/RS422-Interface
S21,S22
S23
TCRST
TCRD
CTRS
TCRR
TCRR
CTSD
TCRD
A/B
A/B
A/B
A/B
28
28
Fig. 4‐11 Modem ZUA29, block diagram
4‐14 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
The ZUA incorporates a 2/4–wire amplifier, which can be looped into a transmission path in order to
compensate the attenuation. It is also used as a switching network for coupling the FSK transmit and
receive signals in and out. The amplifier is switched permanently in 4–wire mode; in 2–wire mode, it
is through–connected in the desired direction according to the incoming levels. Sequence control is
handled by a microcomputer (63701 type).
The ZUA can be looped in to implement a transition from 2–wire to 4–wire lines. Tandem operation
with a high input impedance and a variable output impedance is also possible. The microcomputer
monitors the transmit signal of the ZUA and disconnects the transmit direction as soon as the transmit
level is switched on for more than 1 s. A watchdog timer checks that the microcomputer is functioning
correctly. The voltage monitor trips a reset if the 5 V operating voltage is no longer present.
In addition, a continuous tone can be switched in the transmit direction in order to adjust the level
of the ZUA. The tone can either have a constant frequency or be an FSK signal for tuning the internal
FSK receiver. The activity of the transmit and receive data and the levels on the connected lines are
indicated by LEDs. The connected trunk circuits are accessible via ISEP test sockets on the front
panel. The gain can be set separately with jumpers for each transmission direction. The signals of
F11 and F21 are supplied to the modem.
The transmit signal of the modem is switched to the F12 and F22 outputs with the signal of the analog
switch (MRTS). The transmit level of the modem can be set jointly for both outputs by means of jump
ers. The LD A and LD B LEDs indicate the receive levels of F11 and F21, while the TxD and RxD LEDs
indicate activity on the transmit and receive data lines. The CTRS interface signal switches the trans
mit level of the modem via MRTS. The MDCD input signal is switched to the TCRR interface line and
indicates readiness to receive.
4.3.9 Star Distributor NFK 29–1

The NFK can link up to six different lines, each of which can be set to either 2–wire or 4–wire operation.
Two NFKs with up to 12 lines can be connected in the REU. If NFKs are used in the top section, each
line can be switched to a standby top section as a simulated standby line. A common transformer
of the NFK in the top service section is used for the service line and the simulated standby line. Each
line can be disconnected separately by means of a control line.
ZU-Interface Line amplifier 2...6 Line Interface
F1 IN Analog F1 OUT
Amplifier Amplifier Trans-
Switch former
0 dB/+3 dB
(4-/2-wire)
UF1 Opto- Hook

coupler LED F1 (-3dB)
0 V/12 ... 72 V
F1 OUT Analog Trans- F1 IN

Power Amplifier
source Switch former F1 IN/OUT
0 dB/+20 dB
Line amplifier 2...6 NE 12 NE 11
NOTE: Only 1 of 6 line distributors (F1...F6) is shown. Simulated Standby Line
Fig. 4‐12 Star distributor NFK 29, block diagram
Ed. 08.17 4‐15

RCSE 443 RMMC
The control inputs are electrically isolated from NFK ground. The control states of the lines are indi
cated by means of LEDs on the front panel (LED lit = line disconnected). All the inputs/outputs of the
line interface have a balanced impedance of 600 W and are electrically isolated from one another. The
transmit and receive levels can be measured at the test sockets on the front panel.
4.3.10 Multiplexer RS232
The Multiplexer RS232 (MPX) board is used to connect ILS subsystems (e.g. LLZ, GP) via dedicated
lines to the RCSE. Each Multiplexer RS232 board provides six of these dedicated lines. The board
is used within remote control equipment instead of the star distributor NFK29. On the ILS subsystem
side an RS232 resp. RS422 modem builds the dedicated line connection instead of a ZU modem.
The MPX board has to be plugged into the NFK1 or NFK2 slot of the remote control subrack. It is also
possible to use two of the MPX boards (plugged into NFK1 and NFK2 slots) to provide 12 of the dedi
cated line connections to ILS subsystems.
The MPX RS232 is internally driven by the 1a3 (2a3) channel of the Connector Back Panel (CBP) of
the Serial Interface Board (SIB).
The 6 outputs (channels) of the MPX board are configurable via jumpers. The possible output modes
are RS232, RS422 or TTL. The mode of the TXD and RXD (RS232 or TTL) input channels for the board
is also configurable. LEDs on the front side of the board indicate the state of the TXD and RXD input
channels and of the output channels 1 to 6.
4‐16 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
4.3.11 Power Supply

4.3.11.1 AC/DC Converter
4.3.11.1.1 AC/DC Converter Puls AP346
The AC/DC converter contains a two–stage long–range transformer (48/60 V) and an active MOSFET
synchronous rectifier. The supply voltage at the input may be 100 to 240 VAC, and the allowable out
put power is 60 W. Over–voltage protection (OVP) and over–temperature protection (OTP) prevent
problems during operation under abnormal ambient conditions.
16
PF
30 T3.15A/250V
L F
Cycle 4
(Vin) I converter
Vout1
L 5V
Control
U T 75 kHz 6
typical Control Reglulator
PF OVP
28 ϑ E
8
N R
GND1
(GNDin)
10
32 Temperature
PE monitoring
OTP
18
In-phase Vout2
regulator +12 V
Temperature
monitoring
OTP
20
GND2,3
22
In-phase
regulator Vout3
-12 V
Fig. 4‐13 AC/DC converter type Puls AP346, block diagram
Ed. 08.17 4‐17

RCSE 443 RMMC
4.3.11.1.2 AC/DC Converter VERO TRIVOLT PK60
NOTE: This AC/DC converter was used in former versions of the RCSE 443.
The AC/DC converter contains three regulators for generating the desired voltages. The converter
can be switched between AC input voltages of 115 and 230 V. Some protection mechanisms are pro
vided, like OverVoltage Protection (OVP) for the 5 V output voltage generation, or a powerfail signal
generation if a minimum output voltage of 4.8 V is reached.
+5V
+ Sensor
Reg.
OVP
Driver - Sensor
GND 5 V
L
Power Supply
Monitoring
Powerfail
N +12 V
−ϑ
PE Reg.
115/
230 V GND 12V
Reg.
Driver
-12 V
Main
Regulator
Fig. 4‐14 AC/DC converter type VERO TRIVOLT PK60, block diagram
4‐18 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
4.3.11.2 DC/DC Converters

4.3.11.2.1 DC/DC Converter Puls APD346
Until the end of the year 2008, this unit had been in service with the RCSE 443. In newer devices, the
type MGV–DG37–05121–3G (see section 4.3.11.2.2 ) is in service. The DC/DC converter contains a
two–stage long–range transformer (48/60 V) and an active MOSFET synchronous rectifier. The DC
nominal input voltage may be in a range from 30 to 90 V (nominal 36 to 72 VDC), and the allowable
output power is 60 W. Overvoltage protection (OVP) prevent problems during operation under abnor
mal ambient conditions.
28 ϑ
+ Vin F
Cycle 4
I converter
Vout1
L 5V
Control
U T
75 kHz 6
typical Control OVP Reglulator
T4A/250 V E 8
- Vin
R
30 GND1
32 10
PE
Temperature
monitoring
OTP
18
In-phase Vout2
regulator +12 V
Temperature
monitoring
OTP
20
GND2,3
22
In-phase
regulator Vout3
-12 V
Fig. 4‐15 DC/DC converter type Puls APD346, block diagram
4.3.11.2.2 DC/DC Converter MGV–DG37–05121–3G
Since 2009, this converter type is used as a component in the RCSE 443. Before, DC/DC converter
Puls APD346 was used, see section 4.3.11.2.1 above. The voltage range is 40 to 80 V. The meanings
of the two voltage labels on the left of the REU plexiglass panel are explained below:
a) [DC/DC 36 V]
b) [DC/DC 72 V]
This means, either input voltage 36 V DC or 72 V DC can be used. One of the square fields on the
two silver labels was ticked before factory delivery showing which input voltage is applied in the re
spective application.
The label printing on the very left side of the REU back panel shows: [6.3 AT / VDC / 36 – 72 V]. This
also means, that either 36 V DC or 72 V DC can be used.
Ed. 08.17 4‐19

RCSE 443 RMMC
4.3.11.2.3 DC/DC Converter MGV–DG37–05121–2G

The DC/DC converter contains a two–stage long–range transformer (18/40 V) and an active MOSFET
synchronous rectifier. The DC nominal input voltage may be in a range from 18 to 40 V (nominal 36
to 72 VDC), and the allowable output power is 60 W. Overvoltage protection (OVP) prevent problems
during operation under abnormal ambient conditions.
4.3.12 INC Panel

The INC panel is the status display of the RCSE. For standard applications the INC panel is mounted
directly as a front panel to the REU 19” subrack. It is connected to the REU ETX–CPU parallel printer
port X7. The INC is supplied with +5 V by the REU power module.
It comprises the front plate with 8 text fields for station names (4 characters each, built by an LED dot
matrix), status indicators and select keys, and of the LED–display driver.
An adapter plate (see also section 2.3.2.12) at the rear side of the front plate provides the external
interfaces (to another INC panel, to the REU ETX–CPU board and to the power supply).
NOTE: As an optional application, a RCSE with doubled INC panel (on top of each other) is avai
lable to monitor and control the status of up to 16 stations/subsystems (enlargement kit,
for ref. no. see section 4.2).
4‐20 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
4.4 RCSE 443 SOFTWARE

4.4.1 General
The central feature of the RCSE/REU is an industrial PC system which uses DR–DOS (Version 7.03
or higher). All the data required to run the remote control system correctly (the operating parameters)
is saved in a file on the drive d: ('RAM side') of the flash disk on the processor board ETX–CPU. The
actual RC program and the operating system (DR–DOS) are stored on the drive c: ('EPROM side')
of the flash disk on the ETX–CPU processor board as normal DR–DOS files.
4.4.1.1 Data Protection

The flash disk on the processor board ETX–CPU is managed by DR–DOS. DR–DOS is loaded when
the system is started up. The RC program is loaded in the program memory with the DOS automatic
execution batch file function (AUTOEXEC.BAT). The configuration file (CONFIG.SYS) is loaded next.
The configuration file can only be modified by authorized persons.
Two cyclic redundancy check bytes, which ensure the necessary data transmission reliability, are ap
pended to all telegrams sent during communication via the synchronous and asynchronous inter
faces. The only exception (for historical reasons) is communication via the ZU1 with the various SYS
TEM 4000 navaids stations, which have in the past been remote–controlled with the RCMS 4000. A
parity byte is used to protect this data.
4.4.1.2 Maintenance Mode and Password

The REU system incorporates a maintenance mode, in which the REU itself and all the stations can
be operated and programmed. The maintenance mode is controlled via the following interfaces:
– Maintenance Data Terminal (PC)
– Remote Maintenance Center (RMC)
– Ethernet LAN
In order to protect the REU system against outside, unauthorized access at these open interfaces,
the REU demands that a code be entered (16 different users with variable passwords, 6 characters
long). A login command and the <password> are transferred to the REU whenever the ADRACS user
program is started; a logout command is transferred when it is exited. Delivery situation is, that the
user 0 has a free (empty) password, the users 1 to 15 are disabled.
The login procedure does not allow more than 3 input attempts. The first three unsuccessful attempts
are acknowledged with the error code 'PASSWORD AUTHORITY FAILURE'. If a further unsuccessful
attempt is made, all inputs are initially disabled for the next 3 minutes, i.e. no more error codes are
output by the REU in response to telegrams during this period, even if the password is entered cor
rectly. The error code 'LOGIN REU CLOSED' is generated after any input. The input lock is extended
by another minute each time a new attempt is made; it is increased to 60 minutes after the 10th at
tempt. When this period has elapsed, the error code 'THERE WERE WRONG LOGINS' is generated
the next time a correct login attempt is made, to inform the user that there has been an unauthorized
access attempt. If there is no communication after a correct login, this interface is locked by the REU
after 2 minutes, i.e. a new login command must be entered.
Maintenance communication can only be set for one user at a time (PC, Ethernet LAN or maintenance
center), i.e. all other users have no access to maintenance mode (read–out data possible) until the
end of the current session. The other users receive an 'OTHER USER IS MASTER' error message in
this mode.
Ed. 08.17 4‐21

RCSE 443 RMMC
4.4.2 Communication via Switched Lines (PTT)
Providing a modem is installed in the REU, it can be used to exchange data with any other RMC (re
mote maintenance center) or PC. The protocol corresponds to the PC telegram types. The RMC has
either a master function or a slave function.
Master function: If the requirement for this function is specified in the configuration file, a connection
to the remote maintenance center is set up according to V.25bis conventions each time a stable status
change occurs in the complete system (stable for at least 5 minutes), in order to report the new status.
If the connection cannot be set up successfully (busy, etc.), up to six further attempts are made alter
nately using switched circuits 1 and 2 (if the latter exists). A statistical delay of at least 1 minute and
no more than 6 minutes is inserted between the dial attempts (random–function generator). The sta
tistical delay is necessary due to the fact that several REUs may want to send a status message to
the remote maintenance center at the same time. It prevents them from blocking each other. The con
nection is cleared down again after the telegrams have been transmitted successfully.
Slave function: Either the status or maintenance data is transmitted when the remote maintenance
center is called, depending on the situation and on a correct login command being entered. The hard
ware of the REU supplies a modem (dial modem 28.8/64K) via a USART (on SIB). The information
then passes via the telephone network (PTT) to the remote maintenance center.
NOTE: Telegrams are exchanged in this way externally only with subscribers who can be dialed
by the REU (RCSE/LCSU). It is not planned to allow telegrams to be exchanged following
an external call.
4.4.3 Data Com Error
The data com error of a station is set if an attempt to exchange telegrams between the REU and the
desired station fails x times in a row. The number 'x' can be set in the configuration file for each station.
The data com error is reset after each successful telegram exchange and the data com error counter
is set to 0.
4.4.4 PC Control / PC Maintenance
If telegrams are sent to a station with a PC via the REU, and if these telegrams contain a set PC control
bit, PC control and PC maintenance are set for this station. PC control (not PC maintenance) is also
set for all the stations which either belong to this system (runway) or which are collocated with it. PC
control is reset 10 s after the last telegram with the PC control bit. The delay for PC maintenance is
7 s. This ensures that the INC does not start to buzz as soon as the MAINTENANCE lamp goes out.
4.4.5 Switch Control
If telegrams are sent to a station with a PC via the REU, and if these telegrams contain a set switch
control bit, switch control is set for this station. This telegram also contains the states of the two switch
control switches (on the INC board). Switch control is set additionally for all the stations which either
belong to this system (runway) or which are collocated with it. Switch control is reset 10 seconds after
the last telegram with the switch control bit. If a PC is switched to a control panel with switch control,
an 'RPU IS MASTER' message is output on the PC.
4‐22 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
4.4.6 Runway Information

4.4.6.1 Runway Status
The runway status only refers to the stations which belong to this runway. If no stations belong to the
runway, all the states will be 'OFF'. The meaning of the runway status is shown as a logical AND–com
bination.
OPERATIONAL (not ALARM (DME, FFM, MARKER)) and (not Local–Control (GP, LLZ)) and
NORMAL (GP, LLZ)
DEGRADED (not OPERATIONAL) and (not ALARM (GP, LLZ))
SHUTDOWN (not OPERATIONAL) and (not DEGRADED)
ENABLE DATA–COM (DME, GP, LLZ) and (not Local–Control (GP, LLZ)) and
(not PC–Control (DME, GP, LLZ)) and (not (Shut–Down–TX1 and
Shut–Down–TX2 (DME)) and (not Switch–Control (DME, GP, LLZ))
4.4.6.2 Runway Select

The runway is normally selected via the CTUs. The CTUs send the status of the runway select switch
(key switch) to the REU every 2 s. This telegram also contains the states of the two runway select
enable switches (on the CTU board). The REU only evaluates the runway select switches whose run
way select enable switches are set to 'ON'. The status of the runway select switch is saved in the run
way select bit. If a valid runway select telegram is not received for a runway for more than 10 s, the
REU assumes that the corresponding CTU is no longer functioning correctly and allows the PC to
manipulate the runway select bit for this runway. This only applies until another valid telegram is re
ceived from the CTU. Otherwise, the PC is not allowed to alter the runway select bit.
If there are several cascaded CTUs, the previous CTU in the chain which is set to enable for one run
way, checks whether or not the next CTUs have the same setting for the same runway. If not – e.g.
if CTU 1 is set to enable and CTU 2 to disable – the next CTU is ignored. If the opposite is true – i.e.
if CTU 1 is set to disable and CTU 2 to enable – there are no restrictions. A runway can only be shut
down by the master CTU which is set to enable for it. The other CTUs in the chain are set to disable.
4.4.6.3 Automatic Disable (Forced Shutdown)

The GP, LLZ and marker stations can be disabled automatically. Two stations (master stations), whose
alarms are to cause the stations to be shut down, can be defined for each of the above types. They
are defined with the runway select bit, which is ANDed with the automatic disable bit.
There are two configurable times for each master station to which the automatic disable function is
to apply. The first time determines the delay after an alarm before the station is shut down ('ON' time).
The second time defines the delay which elapses before the station is switched on again after the
alarm ('OFF' time). The following rules must be observed when defining the automatic disable states:
– The automatic disable function is activated for a station (or remains active) if one of the master sta
tions has an alarm for longer than the 'ON' time.
– The automatic disable function is deactivated if all the master stations have no more alarms for
longer than the 'OFF' time.
In all other situations, the automatic disable state remains the same. When the REU is started up, an
alarm at a master station does not activate the automatic disable function. This is not possible until
either 60 seconds have passed since the master station alarm was tripped or after the alarm has been
canceled again. In the case of the markers, the automatic disable state is frozen when PC or switch
control is set and not updated again until the markers no longer have PC or switch control.
Ed. 08.17 4‐23

RCSE 443 RMMC
4‐24 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Maintenance
CHAPTER 5
MAINTENANCE, FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR
5.1 MAINTENANCE
5.1.1 General
Within this chapter, two basic types of preventive maintenance are described, namely periodic main
tenance and normal maintenance. Since the RCSE does not comprise any part which is subject to
mechanical wear and tear, the periodic maintenance intervals can be made longer than usual. In addi
tion to the periodic maintenance work, there are a few activities of normal maintenance which should
be performed when necessary. Should a repair be necessary in case of a fault, this is defined as 'cor
rective maintenance' activity.
NOTE: The responsible authorities (e.g. ATC/Controls) must be informed before commencing
any maintenance work in accordance with national regulations!
5.1.2 Elimination of Electrostatic Charges

The RCSE443 device contains subassemblies (plug–in cards) equipped with components which
are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. When replacing subassemblies and plug–in cards contain
ing electrostatically sensitive components, special precautionary measures should be taken dur
ing removal, transport and installation in order to prevent damage to the components. We refer to
the manufacturer's customer documentation.

If any of the maintenance personnel needs to touch subassemblies which contain electrostatically
sensitive components, they should place both hands flat on a grounded conductive surface for a few
seconds to eliminate static charges. The subassembly can be touched – preferably at an insulator
(board edge, lever mechanism, etc.) – as soon as the potential has been equalized in this manner.
It is advisable to avoid touching the contacts of the plug–in connectors, the conductor paths and the
components themselves. Some of the subassemblies must be left in their antistatic packaging or
plastic bags as long as possible.
Removing a subassembly in case of repair or maintenance activity

1. Switch off the system before beginning the replacement procedure.
2. Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded system (rack) with both
hands and/or use an earthing cable on the arm.
3. Remove the subassembly and lay it down on a bench with a grounded conductive worktop.
hands and/or use an earthing cable on the arm.
2. Remove the subassembly from the antistatic plastic bag.
3. Install the subassembly.
4. Switch the system on again.
Ed. 08.17 5–1

RCSE 443 RMMC
Maintenance Description and Operation
5.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

Preventive maintenance is scheduled in daily, weekly, monthly or yearly measures which are neces
sary or recommended. The following table contains these recommendations.
No. After initial setup
1 Basic settings
For first alignment procedures for Navaids 400 and SYSTEM 4000 stations (LLZ, GP, FFM,
CVOR, DVOR) the ADRACS user program has to be used, see Technical Manual ADRACS, ref.
no. 83140 55324. For DME/TACAN refer to the appropriate technical manuals.
2 Dial numbers
It is useful to generate a dial number directory. This is done with ADRACS command
'Edit phonenumber File' of the 'RC Management' menu 'File Transfer'. The directory is created
automatically in the PC file ...\<site name>\*.ptt.
No. Daily maintenance

– No recommended activities.
No. Weekly maintenance

3 HISTORY file
After starting, the ADRACS software informs the user with a window message that a 'HISTORY
CHANGED' event has taken place. The HISTORY file of a station should be stored in the PC.
It is recommended to do this weekly at first. Afterwards it may be done monthly or if a change
in history has taken place.
4 Backup
A regular backup of collected data on a separate floppy disk or at least a regular printout
should be performed to prevent data loss of maintenance data, collected over a longer period.
It is recommended to do this weekly at first. Afterwards it may be done monthly or if a change
has taken place.
No. Monthly maintenance, additional to weekly

5 Date/Time
It is recommended to check the correctness of the REU date and time. An incorrect time or
date will result in differences between summer time and winter time setting or in other differ
ences. If the time or date is incorrect, adjust this with the ADRACS function 'Date&Time REU' of
the 'RC Management' menu. As an alternative, an (optional) GPS real–time clock can be used
(see section 3.2.9).
No. Yearly maintenance, additional to weekly and monthly

6 Damage check and visual inspection (see section 5.2.1) and/or
7 Cleaning of the equipment housing and the INC panel (see section 5.2.1.1)
No. Five–yearly maintenance

8 Preventive exchange of the 3 V backup battery (see section 5.3.1)
5–2 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Maintenance
5.2.1 Damage Check and Visual inspection
The following system parts have to be checked visually for entirety:

- Visual check for outside damages of the equipment housing, INC panel and cabling.
- Tight fitting of all cable connections and earthing connections (internal and external).
- Tight fitting of all mechanical parts (screws and nuts).
- Openings of the equipment housing should be checked for dust, dirt or other air flow obstacles.
If necessary, clean this part.
5.2.1.1 Cleaning of the Equipment Housing and the INC Panel

NOTE: Cleaning aids, such as brushes and dusters, must be made of antistatic material. See also
the instructions about the elimination of electrostatic charges in section 5.1.2.
Use clean water or soap suds to clean the front panel. Only two types of alcohol, namely Ethyl alcohol
or Glycol, should be used to remove heavier layers of dirt on the front panel. Cleaning procedure:
Moisten a cloth a little with one of the liquids mentioned above and remove dirt.
5.2.1.2 Dusting the Subassemblies
the instructions about the elimination of electrostatic charges in section 5.1.2.
Dusting of the subassemblies should only be done in conjunction with the removal of a subassembly
when this becomes necessary in any case of some other purpose. Even then, subassemblies should
only be dusted if dust was detected by the visual check. They should only be dusted using a soft brush
and, if possible, with the aid of a vacuum cleaner. During such operations, it is essential to observe
all precautionary measures described in section 5.3.2 for voltage–sensitive semiconductors.
Ed. 08.17 5–3

RCSE 443 RMMC
Maintenance Description and Operation
5.3 NORMAL MAINTENANCE

5.3.1 Preventive Exchange of the 3 V Lithium Backup Battery
In case of a supply voltage drop, the 3 V Lithium battery backs a real‐time clock (RTC) which holds
the system time, the date and a wake up time. This battery is located on the ETX–CPU board of the
REU.
Lithium batteries have an extended lifetime of approx. 10 years, depending on the local environment.
It ages as a result of self–discharging. As a preventive measure, it is advisable to install a replacement
battery after about five years of operation.
In the delivery state, an isolation foil sticks between battery and the tongue of the battery holder (see
arrow in the below figure). Before commissioning, this foil has to be removed. The battery supply volt
age can also be interrupted by opening jumper X17, especially before long downtime periods (e.g.
for storage).
Summary of routine maintenance measures:
– Preventive exchange battery of 3 V Lithium backup battery (interval: 5 years).
– The presence of dirt or moisture on the board can increase the battery current consumption and
decrease the battery life. If too dirty, clean the board (yearly).
! CAUTION

battery.
X15
X16
X14 V1.4 V6
Isolation foil
1 2 3
D4
X47
X48
X46
X18
X20
+
V3
1 V5
X17 BAT
X50
Fig. 5‐1 Battery location on the ETX board; battery isolation foil must be removed
5–4 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Fault Location
5.4 FAULT LOCATION

5.4.1 Frequently Asked Questions
This section shows the quickest way for troubleshooting in a short form description. Fault symptoms
are explained in the sequence of their general probability. More detailed descriptions for fixing the
faults are explained in the following sections.
Fault symptom: Equipment does not start at all

- Verify external power supply fed to the equipment and the correct fitting of the power supply cable's
plugs and the fuses. See section 5.4.5 'Fault Location Table Power Supply'
- Verify the correct fitting of all external data connection cables
- Verify the correct fitting of all internal flat ribbon cable connections.
Fault symptom: Communication functions are not available

- Check which REU component / which connection line to a station of the Navaids system does not
work properly. When known, verify that all jumpers and DIP‐Fix–switches of both system sides are
set properly. 'Both system sides' means: Settings of the specific REU component as well as the
corresponding station (e.g. ILS).
– When all settings are OK, the corresponding hardware component could be defective. An example
could be a faulty modem, damaged by overvoltage caused by lightning stroke somewhere along
the connecting line. Check LED indications on each modem board's front side. Exchange the re
spective component with a spare part and test the function again. If modem function is OK, the
SIB board or ETX board could be the reason for the fault. Use the fault location tables in the refer
ring sections 5.4.8 and 5.4.9. As an alternative or when time is very limited, just exchange the suspi
cious printed circuit board with a spare part and test the function again.
Fault symptom: Equipment does not react after starting the lamp lest
- Check the fuses and the power supply of INC and REU –> Re–establish power supply or replace
fuse
- The INC panel could be faulty –> Exchange the INC panel
- The CPU could be faulty –> Exchange the ETX board.
Fault symptom: RCSE equipment is reacting faultily after reset

- This could occur when a new/modified configuration file version (with extension *.sit; *.ptt; *.oio;
*.lke) is used for the first time. In case the RCSE equipment is not reacting as normally expected
after reset (e.g. the life–LED of SIB board at remote control unit is not blinking, RCSE doesn't start
running or repeats resetting, or the RCSE is resetting permanently), one of the configuration files
on the RAM side could be damaged or wrong for this site. To fix the problem, a special procedure
has to be performed described in section 2.4.3 or the correct configuration files have to be in
stalled.
Ed. 08.17 5–5

RCSE 443 RMMC
Fault Location Description and Operation
5.4.2 Testing the Voltage of the 3 V Lithium Backup Battery
Two ways for checking the voltage of the 3 V Lithium backup battery are described below.
X15
X16
X14 V1.4 V6
1 2 3
Battery isolation foil
D4
X47
X48
X46
X18
X20
+
V3
1 V5
X17 BAT
X50
Fig. 5‐2 Measuring the voltage of the 3 V Lithium battery on the ETX board
Measuring the voltage of the 3 V Lithium backup battery with a digital voltmeter
Necessary tool: Digital voltmeter
Prerequisite: The RCSE 443 must be switched off before starting with this work
1. Disassemble the ETX board from the subrack (see section 5.5.3.1)
2. Verify that jumper X17 is set (= battery is connected). The battery isolation foil must be removed
(see Fig. 5‐2)
3. Contact one probe of the voltmeter on the top surface of the battery, contact the other probe on
the negative pole of jumper X17
4. If the measured voltage is =< 2.9 V, the battery has to be replaced (see section 5.5.3.3). A higher
voltage indicates that the battery is in a good condition.
Checking the voltage / state of readiness of the 3 V Lithium backup battery with a view on
battery LED V5
Prerequisite: The RCSE 443 must be switched on before starting with this work
1. Disassemble the INC panel in order to have a view on LED V5 on the ETX board in the RCSE 443
(see section 5.5.3.1). The battery isolation foil must be removed (see Fig. 5‐2)!
2. Verify that jumper X17 is set (= battery is connected). The battery isolation foil must be removed
3. Pull off the jumper X17 on the ETX board
4. Set the jumper X17 again
5. Check the battery LED V5.
If the LED lights up red, the battery is faulty or empty and the battery has to be replaced (see section
5.5.3.3).
If the red LED light is out, the battery is in a good condition.
5–6 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
5.4.3 Lamp Test of the INC Panel

This test checks the correct function of all visual indicators on the INC panel and – if activated – the
buzzer. It also shows, whether the CPU has acquired button commands and is able to operate the
drive output registers correctly. A lamp test is started automatically when the equipment is switched
on. As long as the button LAMP TEST is pushed, no other button commands are allowed.
Starting the lamp test manually
1. Push the button LAMP TEST on the INC panel.
2. As long as the button LAMP TEST is pushed, the lamp test is activated: All indicators of the INC
panel are on and all LED text displays indicate 'TEST'. The buzzer sounds. If a station has been
selected before the lamp test, it remains selected and the request of selected state telegrams runs
in the background.
5.4.4 Reading the Fault Location Tables
There are five columns in the fault location tables: Step, Fault, A to C. To execute the fault location,
start with the left column and proceed to the right; following A, B, C; and – if more steps are sequenced
– again in next row from A to C. Abbreviations: Y= Yes; N= No.
The column 'Fault' names the component/subassembly, which is discussed in the current row.
The fault location tables (sections) in this chapter are not sequenced in the order of fault probability.
5.4.5 Fault Location Table Power Supply

NOTE: Before replacing the AC/DC converter (or the DC/DC converter) or before investigating
other fault causes, check the availability of external power supply fed to the equipment.
Step Fault A B C
1 AC/DC converter Correct AC supply voltage AC power mains switch ON? Y: Exchange the AC/DC
used? (REU: 115 V or 230 V) (switch is on the REU rear) converter
2 DC/DC converter Measure supply voltage at the
INC panel: nominal + 5 V
3 AC/DC converter Is the status–LED 2) of the AC input power available? N: Exchange the AC/DC
AC/DC converter (internal) If yes, check the two AC‐mains converter
off? fuses. Replace once if blown.
4 AC/DC converter Life–LED 1) of the ETX–board AC power mains switch ON? Y: Exchange the AC/DC
(internal) off? (AC mains switch is on the converter
REU rear side)
5 DC/DC converter DC mains switch ON? Is the status–LED 1) (internal) Y: Exchange the DC/DC
(switch is on the REU rear) of DC/DC converter off? converter
6 DC/DC converter Correct DC supply voltage Y: Exchange the DC/DC con

used? verter
7 DC/DC converter Life–LED 1) of the ETX– DC power mains switch ON? Y: Exchange the DC/DC
board (internal) off? (DC mains switch is on the converter
REU rear side)
1) See Fig. 3‐1 for the location of this LED (internal, behind INC panel).
2) Can be defined as fuse.
NOTE: The power supply of the 3 V Lithium battery (located on the ETX board) backs a real–time
clock which contains the system time, the date and a wake–up time in case of a supply
voltage drop. Fault location referring this battery is described in connection with the ETX
board in section 5.4.8.
Ed. 08.17 5–7

RCSE 443 RMMC
5.4.6 Overview of Subassembly Fault Location Tables
Some of the REU subassemblies have DIP–FIX switches or jumpers on the component side. The
jumpers act either as on/off switches or as changeover switches. The DIP–FIX switches and jumpers
can be set or placed to particular positions in order to adapt universal subassemblies to specific
equipment types. These and other possible fault possibilities can be checked in greater detail in the
listed, referring sections. The list of power supply assemblies can be found in section 4.2.
NOTE: Before installing a spare subassembly, check and – if necessary – correct the position of
the DIP–FIX switches and jumpers.
No. Subassembly Short name Reference

1 REU, Connector Back Panel REU 2.3.2.1
The Remote Electronic Unit (REU) is one component of the RCSE equipment, besides the INdication and Control
(INC) panel.
2 Processor Board ETX–CPU ETX 2.3.2.2
The ETX processor board is providing an Ethernet controller interface. This allows the REU to be linked up to a
THIN–Wire Ethernet LAN.
3 Serial Interface Board SIB 2.3.2.3
mind configuration (e.g. 1a3…)
The SIB (Serial Interface Board) board is employed in the REU synchronous and parallel communication channels.
4 NFK (star distributor; in German: Niederfrequenzknoten) NFK 2.3.2.4
5 MODEM LGM28.8 LGM28.8 2.3.2.6
The LGM 28.8 is a high speed modem for duplex operation which supports all common duplex modulation proce
dures.
6 MODEM LGM64K (ISDN Modem) LGM64K 2.3.2.7
The LGM 64K is an ISDN terminal adapter (module) in the Eurocard format for the use of public ISDN switched
lines and dedicated lines.
7 MODEM ZUA29 ZUA29 2.3.2.8
The ZUA is an interface board for converting a V.24/V.28 (RS232C) or V.11 (RS422) interface to an FSK signal (fre
quency shift keying) according to CCITT V.23 (half duplex operation).
8 MODEM ZU1 ZU1 2.3.2.9
The ZU1 is a voice frequency telegraphy facility (VFT) for transmitting digital signals on transmission links with a
frequency range between 300 Hz and 3.4 kHz, such as telephone lines.
9 MODEM LGM9600H1 LGM9600H1 2.3.2.10
The LGM 9600H1 is a universally applicable half duplex permanent line modem.
10 Dedicated Line Modem LGM1200MD LGM1200 2.3.2.11
The LGM1200MD is a universally applicable half duplex permanent line modem.
11 INC panel, RCSE Indication and Control panel INC 2.3.2.12
Is used for INdication and Control. The DIP switch and the jumpers are not used (switched OFF resp. open jum
per). No settings have to be done.
12 LGM Extender 2 Unit LGM Extender 2.3.2.13
The LGM Extender 2 Unit is an opto– and electrically isolated level converter. It is able to convert TTL signals to
RS232 resp. to RS422 signals and vice versa.
5–8 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
No. Subassembly (cont.) Short name Reference

13 OIO (optional) OIO 2.3.2.14
The optional OIO is used in the REU to connect IN or OUT control signals from/to external equipment.
It provides 32 decoupled inputs and outputs by means of optocouplers.
14 Multiplexer RS232 MPX 2.3.2.15
The Multiplexer RS232 (MPX) is used to connect ILS subsystems via dedicated lines to the RCSE.
1) The code numbers given may differ to those of the delivered installation in individual cases. In such cases, the actual code
2) The code number of the OIO board depends on the configuration (input/output and voltage range).
3) The code numbers of the ETX–CPU and SIB boards depend on configuration of the multi–IRQ function (see section
2.3.2.2).
Fig. 5‐3: Overview of subassemblies containing DIP–FIX switches and jumpers
5.4.7 Fault Location Table RCSE Indication and Control Panel (INC Panel)
The INC panel is the status display of the RCSE. More details about it are given in section 4.3.12.
Step Fault A B C
1 INC Single LEDs on the INC do Exchange the INC panel
not light up with the lamp test
or in normal operation
2 INC Incorrect indications on the Check the cable connections Exchange the ETX board
INC panel on the REU backpanel and on or INC panel
the ETX board
3 INC Alarm buzzer does not sound Is alarm buzzer set silent as Y: Set buzzer loud again if
e.g. along with the lamp test described in section 3.2.3.2? desired
N: Exchange INC panel
4 INC All station columns remain The number of INC columns Modify the configuration or
empty or as station name, (1, 2 or 8 columns) is larger use an INC with more col
'No' and 'Stat' is displayed on than the assigned INC. This umns (for more details
the LEDs can be checked using the about the technical back
main status window of ground of the column dis
ADRACS (–> 'Check configu play, see section 3.2.5.1).
ration').
Ed. 08.17 5–9

RCSE 443 RMMC
Step Fault cont. A cont. B cont. C cont.

5 INC There is only the LED–display The configuration contains ei This can be checked with
configuration 'No' and 'Stat' ther no stations, which are dis 'File transfer' in ADRACS
problem played on the panel positions or delete faulty files as de
1 to 8 or scribed in section 2.4.3.
INC–configuration is invalid or
faulty.
6 INC No satisfying result in the When there is a constant beep – Check configuration with
configuration selected state of the buzzer in the RPU function in ADRACS
problem selected–state and at the same
time lighting–up lamps – Check communication
'ENV ALARM' or 'OTHER (modem or telephone line
WARNING': Check the could be faulty)
RPU–panel–function in
ADRACS, the referring LCD
texts are explained there.
The same is true when – in
spite of pushing the button
REQUEST RELEASE – the
'CONTROL ENABLED'–lamp
(switch control) does not light
up. This lamp can only light
up, when the telegrams do not
come through to the referring
NAV–station (possible rea
sons: Communication is faulty)
5.4.8 Fault Location Table ETX–CPU Processor Board
The ETX–CPU processor board is providing an Ethernet controller interface. This allows the REU to
be linked up to a THIN–Wire Ethernet LAN. The + 5 V voltage necessary for operation is supplied from
the bus via the VG connector. As a back–up for the real–time clock, a 3 V Lithium battery is used.
Step Fault A B C
1 ETX–CPU pro Constant beep of the buzzer Check cable connections on Exchange the ETX–CPU
cessor board in the INC panel the REU backpanel and on the processor board.
ETX–CPU processor board.
2 Lithium battery The real–time clock (RTC) is Is the LED V5 on? Y: Replace 3 V Lithium bat
or real–time wrong or off (LED V5 on = 'Battery fault' or tery; see section 5.5.3.3
clock (RTC) 'Battery empty') N: Jumper X17 set?
N: If jumper X17 is not set, N: Exchange ETX–CPU pro
set it. cessor board.
3 Flash disk on No access on flash disk? Check if after the reset LED V3 If this is the case, exchange
the ETX–CPU See section 2.4.2.1 is not blinking green. the ETX–CPU processor
processor boar board.
d
4 ETX–CPU pro LED V6 lights green: Is jumper X18 set? N: Set jumper X18.
cessor board Watchdog time–out
function is activated Y: Programm execution in
the microprocessor may be
faulty; see section 4.3.1
Exchange the ETX–CPU
processor board
5–10 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Step Fault cont. A cont. B cont. C cont.

5 ETX–CPU pro No Ethernet network function Is jumper X50 set to position N: Set X50 to 2–3
cessor board. available 2–3 ('Ethernet interface ena Y: Check connection of
bled') ? Ethernet line; see section
2.3.4
6 Configuration Configuration file *.sit is not Y: Use a new, correct *.sit file
file *.sit activated? and activate it.
7 Configuration RCSE 443 is reacting faulty Perform the procedure de Remark: Standard execut
problem when switched on after the scribed in section 2.4.3 able file REU.EXE on the
configuration flash (drive c:) may be
damaged
Check X46–48. Remark: Setting depends on
See section 2.3.2.2. SIB D3–PAL type and type of
remote control equipment.
Not applicable for ref. no.
52828 15153
8 Configuration RCSE is resetting permanent One or more of the configura For fixing the problem, try
problem at ly tion files *.sit, *.ptt, *.oio, *.lke the procedure described in
flash memory at the RAM side of the REU section 2.4.3. Use a dongle
(on drive d: – a part of the type B.
flash disk on the processor bo
ard) are damaged or wrong for
this site.
5.4.9 Fault Location Table SIB Board
The SIB (Serial Interface Board) is employed in the REU synchronous and parallel communication
channels. The code number of the SIB board depends on the configuration of the multi–IRQ function
(see section 2.3.2.3).
Always start with the modems when performing the fault location.
Step Fault A B C
1 SIB / Modem Communication via RS422, Verify proper setting of jump Exchange SIB board
RS232, TTL is faulty ers X46, X47, X48 (set accord
ing to section 2.3.2.3 ?)
2 SIB / Modem Faulty SIB functions. Verify proper setting of jump Exchange SIB board
Function '2 Wait States' is not ers X36 (set according to sec
provided. tion 2.3.2.3 ?)
3 SIB / Modem Faulty SIB functions. Check jumper setting of X7: Y: Exchange SIB board
Function Position 2–3 set?
'No DMA Operation'
is not provided
4 SIB / Modem Multi–IRQ function is not avail Check jumper setting: N: Set X15, X16 accord
able. Remark: Multi–IRQ func X15 set? ingly
tion is only applicable for SIB X16 open?
ref. no. 84045 83107 Y: Check board code
number
Ed. 08.17 5–11

RCSE 443 RMMC
5.4.10 Fault Location Table NFK Board

Two NFKs with up to 12 lines can be connected in the REU.
Step Fault A B C
1 NFK / Modem NFK board function is faulty Are all jumpers set according Y: Exchange the NFK
to section 2.3.2.4 ? board or SIB board
5.4.11 Fault Location Table Modem LGM28.8
The LGM 28.8 is a high speed modem for duplex operation which supports all common duplex modu
lation procedures.
Step Fault A B C
1 Modem Modem LGM28.8 functions Are all jumpers and Check the LEDs according
LGM28.8 faulty DIP–switches set according to to the modem user manual
section 2.3.2.5 ?
Check the SIB board Exchange the modem
5.4.12 Fault Location Table Modem LGM64K (ISDN Modem)
The LGM 64K is an ISDN terminal adapter (module) in the Eurocard format for the use of public ISDN
switched lines and dedicated lines. Regarding the hardware, the LGM64K is built up the same way
like the LGM28.8, and the pins are compatible.
Step Fault A B C
1 Modem Modem LGM64K functions Are all jumpers and Check the LEDs according
LGM64K faulty DIP–switches set according to to the modem user manual
section 2.3.2.7 ?
5.4.13 Fault Location Table Modem ZUA29

The ZUA is an interface board for converting a V.24/V.28 (RS232C) or V.11 (RS422) interface to a FSK
signal (frequency shift keying) according to CCITT V.23 (half duplex operation).
Step Fault A B C
1 Modem ZUA29 Modem ZUA29 functions Are all jumpers and Check the LEDs according
faulty DIP–switches set according to to the modem user manual
section 2.3.2.8 ?
5–12 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
5.4.14 Fault Location Table Modem ZU1
The ZU1 is a voice frequency telegraphy facility (VFT) for transmitting digital signals on transmission
links with a frequency range between 300 Hz and 3.4 kHz, such as telephone lines.
Step Fault A B C
1 Modem ZU1 Modem ZU1 functions faulty Are all jumpers and Check the LEDs according
DIP–switches set according to to the modem user manual
section 2.3.2.9 ?
5.4.15 Fault Location Table Modem LGM9600H1
The LGM9600H1 is a universally applicable half duplex permanent line modem. The data transfer rate
is 1200 or 600 bit/s. It occupies one LGM slot.
Step Fault A B C
1 Modem Modem LGM9600H1 Are all jumpers and Check the LEDs according
LGM9600H1 functions faulty DIP–switches set according to to the modem user manual
section 2.3.2.10 ?
5.4.16 Fault Location Table Modem LGM1200MD (Dedicated Line Modem)
The LGM1200MD is a universally applicable half duplex permanent line modem.
Step Fault A B C
1 Modem Modem LGM1200MD Are all jumpers and Check the LEDs according
LGM1200MD functions faulty DIP–switches set according to to the modem user manual
section 2.3.2.11 ?
5.4.17 Fault Location Table LGM Extender 2 Unit

The LGM Extender 2 Unit is an opto– and electrically isolated level converter. It is able to convert TTL
signals to RS232 resp. to RS422 signals and vice versa.
Step Fault A B C
1 LGM Extender LGM Extender 2 Unit func Are all jumpers and Check the LEDs according
2 Unit tions faulty DIP–switches set according to to the LGM Extender Unit
section 2.3.2.13 ? Settings see 2.3.2.13
Check the SIB board Exchange the LGM Extender 2
Unit
Ed. 08.17 5–13

RCSE 443 RMMC
5.4.18 Fault Location Table OIO board (optional)
The optional OIO board is used in the REU to connect IN or OUT control signals from/to external
equipment. It provides 32 decoupled inputs and outputs by means of optocouplers.
Step Fault A B C
1 OIO board OIO board functions faulty Are all jumpers and Input / Output signals and
DIP–switches set according to the OIO file:
section section 2.3.2.14 ? Is the OIO file =
'reu_conf.oio'?
Are the necessary Input &
Output lines connected?
Are the optocoupler IN/
OUT chips OK (not dam
aged)?
Check the SIB board Exchange the OIO board
5.4.19 Fault Location Table Multiplexer RS232 (MPX)
The Multiplexer RS232 (MPX) board is used to connect ILS subsystems (e.g. LLZ, GP) via dedicated
lines to the RCSE.
Step Fault A B C
1 Multiplexer Multiplexer RS232 Are all jumpers and Check the LEDs for faults
RS232 functions faulty DIP–switches set according to according to section
section section 2.3.2.15 ? 2.3.2.15
Check the SIB board Exchange the multiplexer bo
ard
5–14 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Repair
5.5 REPAIR
5.5.1 General
The repair activities are designed to restore the 'ready' condition of a faulty system in the shortest
possible time. In most cases, the system is repaired by replacing the defective subassembly. The de
fective subassemblies can then be sent to the manufacturer for repair.
NOTE: Subassemblies and components, which are sent to the manufacturer for repair or returns,
must be packed in a way that no damage of the parts could arise. It is recommended to
use the original packing, e.g. of the spare part, or a comparable packing in corresponding
performance to ensure a safe shipping of defective subassemblies or components. As
for handling of subassemblies with electrostatically sensitive components, see section
5.1.2.
5.5.2 Safety Precautions for Repair Works
5.5.2.1 General Safety Regulations
The safety regulations laid down by the local authorities (e.g. concerning accident prevention, work
safety or operation of electronic equipment and navigation systems) must be observed at all times.
The purpose of safety precautions is to protect persons and property, and they must always be
heeded.
– Work should not be carried out outside the shelter or on the antenna system during a storm, due
to the danger of injury by lightning.
– Station shutdown due to repair and maintenance: The responsible authorities must be notified of
any work which may require operation of the system to be interrupted, in accordance with national
regulations.
– Change of system parameters is only allowed for maintenance personnel with specific access level
(i.e. > level 2) to the PC user program ADRACS.
5.5.2.2 Safe Work on the Equipment
The power supply of the equipment must always be disconnected from the mains before any work,
except measuring the voltage is carried out on it.
Ed. 08.17 5–15

RCSE 443 RMMC
Repair Description and Operation
5.5.2.3 Replacing the AC Fuses
CAUTION
The supply voltage must always be disconnected before working on the fuses. Blown
fuses are allowed to be replaced only once. If the fuses blow again, check equipment for
the reason, e.g. short circuits.
The exchangeable AC fuses are located within the AC connector on the back panel of the REU hous
ing (see Fig. 5‐4). Proceed as follows:
Replacing the AC fuses
1. Switch off the RCSE equipment and remove the power supply plug from the AC connector.
2. Open the hinged cover carefully with a suitable auxiliary tool, e.g. small screw driver blade or knife.
3. Withdraw the fuse holder and replace the fuses. If small fuses (20 mm x 5 mm) are used, regard
their position.
4. Insert the fuseholder up to the stop and close the hinged cover.
5. Plug in the AC power supply and switch on the RCSE equipment.
5.5.2.4 Replacing the DC Fuses
CAUTION
The supply voltage must always be disconnected before working on the fuses. Blown
fuses are allowed to be replaced only once. If the fuses blow again, check equipment for
the reason, e.g. short circuits.
The exchangeable DC fuses are located at the DC connector on the back panel of the RCSE unit.
They are arranged within the orange fuse holders within green plastic sockets (see Fig. 5‐4). Proceed
as follows:
Replacing the DC fuses
1. Switch off the RCSE unit and remove the power supply plug from the DC connector.
2. Withdraw the orange fuse holder of the green socket.
3. Replace the fuse.
4. Insert the orange fuse holder into the green socket.
5. Plug in the DC power supply and switch on the RCSE device again.
5.5.3 Repair Works on the Equipment

open here rear of SPU or SM Fuse (2x)
Fuse holder 1/4x1-1/4”
hinged cover
Fuse holder front
hinged cover
supply cable
position of small fuses
leave 1. clamp open
Fig. 5‐4 Replacing AC and DC fuses
5–16 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
AC fuse
F2H/250 V
Mains power input

115/230 VAC
2AT
Only use an AC power

fuse cord with a grounded,
6.3AT three–pronged female
connector according to
IEC 60320–C13,
observe the safety
message in section
2.2.2.1.
+ - DC switch
36-72 VDC
inputs
Fig. 2‐40 DC power inputs, fuse holder, ground
12 V DC -12 V +12 V
output terminals
-12 V +12 V
fuse fuse
1AT 1AT
Fig. 2‐41 12 VDC power output terminals, fuses, ground terminals
Ed. 08.17 5–17

RCSE 443 RMMC
5.5.3.1 Replacing Plug–in Modules and Dismounting/Mounting INC Panel

This instruction applies for modules like power supply, functional boards, modems, optional inter
faces.
To replace a plug–in module
1. Switch off the RCSE unit.
2. Unscrew the 10 screws on the front panel and remove the INC panel from the REU housing in order
to get access to the boards.
3. To remove a printed circuit board assembly from the subrack, release it with the front levers of the
board, if available. Remove it carefully from the REU housing.
4. Perform the required works on the plug‐in module / replace it.
Several of the subassemblies have DIP–FIX switches or jumpers on their pc boards. It is essential
to check that the switches or jumpers on the new subassemblies are set to the same positions as
on the old subassemblies. Chapter 2 contains lists of the DIP–FIX switches and jumpers.
5. For refitting, repeat the above steps in the opposite sequence in order to close the equipment
housing again. When inserting the board, regard the correct fitting to the guiding bars of the REU
housing. Press the assembly carefully in the socket on the backpanel. Take care for correct fitting.
6. Conduct a functional test with the switched on RCSE in order to ensure the proper function of the
replaced plug–in module.
To replace the INC panel

1. Switch off the RCSE unit.
2. Unscrew the 10 screws on the front panel and remove the INC panel from the REU housing.
3. Perform the required works on the INC panel or replace it.
4. Check that all cables have been connected on the INC panel correctly before switching the RCSE
on again. The INC–LPT adapter plate on the rear side of the INC panel provides connectors to the
REU and to another optional INC panel. The DIP switches and the jumpers are not used (switched
OFF resp. open jumpers).
5. For refitting, repeat the above steps in the opposite sequence in order to close the equipment
housing again.
6. Conduct a functional test with the switched on RCSE in order to ensure the proper function of the
replaced INC panel.
5.5.3.2 Mounting and Dismounting of the RCSE Rear Plate
CAUTION
Before mounting and dismounting the RCSE rear plate, the power supply of the RCSE
equipment has to be turned off.
To dismount the RCSE rear plate

1. Unscrew the plexiglass plate (4 pcs. 8 mm screws)
2. Unscrew the RCSE rear plate (4 pcs. hexagon–screws and 6 pcs. 10 mm screws)
Mounting of the RCSE rear plate is done in the opposite sequence. Make sure to use screws of the
same length (like noted above) for the different screw connections.
5–18 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
5.5.3.3 Replacing the 3 V–Lithium Backup Battery
X15
X16
X14 V1.4 V6
Isolation foil
1 2 3
D4
X47
X48
X46 X18
X20
+
V3
1 V5
X17 BAT
X50
Fig. 5‐5 Battery location on the ETX board
To replace the 3 V Lithium backup battery

Prerequisite: The RCSE equipment must be turned OFF.
1. Open the front panel of the REU housing and extract the ETX board as described in section 5.5.3.1,
exception: switching off the power supply
2. Replace the battery
3. Refit the ETX board
4. Close the front panel of the REU housing.
NOTE: – Mind the correct polarity of the battery.

– Only use the specified Panasonic 3 V Lithium battery type. Check the label on the bat
tery. Other types of Lithium batteries are not approved by Thales. See section 4.2 (over
view of RCSE subassemblies) for the referring component code number.
– Do not try to take the battery from its support by means of metallic tools e.g. screw
driver, forceps or similar. This could short–circuit the battery within split–seconds with
the consequence of total battery failure.
– Do not short–circuit the battery when inserting it again into the battery holder. This
could happen e.g. when the tongue of the battery holder contacts both two battery
poles.
! CAUTION

battery.
Ed. 08.17 5–19

RCSE 443 RMMC
5.5.4 Trouble–shooting in Case of Problems with Configuration Files
In case the equipment RCSE 443 is reacting faulty after reset (e.g. the LIFE–LED of the SIB at the re
mote control unit is not blinking, the equipment doesn't start running or repeats resetting), it may be
possible that the configuration files on the RAM side (with extension *.sit, *.ptt, *.oio, *.lke) are dam
aged or wrong for this site.
NOTE: The modification of configuration data defined in the *.sit and *.oio files is partly possible
by the user. Clicking the pull–down menu 'Config' of the 'RC Management' window calls
a configuration tool, providing access to some configuration data for modification. A more
detailed description how to get access to these file types is given in section 3.2.5.
For fixing this kind of problems, see also section 2.4.3.
5–20 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation NAV-LCU 443
CHAPTER 6
NAV–LCU 443
6.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

6.1.1 System Overview
The NAV–LCU 443 device is used as local communication interface between en–route navigation sys
tems TACAN, ELTA, VOR and the RMC (see Fig. 6‐1). The NAV–LCU 443 comprises the Remote con
trol Electronic Unit (REU), which is equipped according to the specific requirements of the NAV sta
tion. It serves as a communication interface between the connected equipment and the public
switched network (PTT), and as a common point for connecting a service terminal (Laptop PC) for
commissioning and maintenance purposes.
NOTE: In NAV 400 en–route navigation systems (e.g. CVOR 431) no separate NAV–LCU device
has to be used as local communication interface (see Fig. 6‐1). The LCU functionality is
integrated in the NAV 400 subrack, i.e. the LCU software is running on the already existing
LCSU/CSB board. Additional modems are used for communication purposes.
The NAV–LCU 443 is a link control unit and provides central points for communication between RMCs
and the navaids systems. The NAV–LCU 443 has direct RS–232/422 interfaces to the VOR, TACAN/
DME and ELTA equipment. For small projects, it is possible to connect the NAV–LCU of en–route navi
gation systems via switched lines to a remote control equipment.
RMC-R RMC-C
PTT
LCSU/CSB
CVOR 431
NAV-LCU 443
TAC ELTA
VOR
4000 TAC ELTA
Fig. 6‐1 Enroute navigation systems with NAV–LCU and integrated LCU function, example
Ed. 08.17 6–1

RCSE 443 RMMC
NAV-LCU 443 Description and Operation
6.1.2 Mechanical Design
The NAV–LCU 443 consists of a REU in a special configuration without an INC panel. The back panel
is similar to the RCSE 443 back panel.
The NAV–LCU configuration of the REU comprises the following subassemblies:

- Processor board ETX–CPU
- Serial Interface board (SIB)
- Auto–dial modem type LGM 28.8D1 at LGM4
- DC/DC converter type MGV–DG37–05121–3G
The above listed subassemblies are also used in the REU configuration of the RCSE 443, i.e. they
are described in chapter 4.
DC/DC converter
LED green
PC2
Vout 1
Processor Board
PC1
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
LGM4
SIB
5 V/12 A ±12 V...15 V/2 A
Fig. 6‐2 REU configuration of NAV–LCU 443, front view
6–2 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation NAV-LCU 443
6.1.3 General Overview NAV–LCU 443
Fig. 6‐3 shows the structure of a typical remote control system for en–route navigation systems using
the NAV–LCU 443.
36 .. 72 VDC
J18/19
REU 5V Processor Board

DC/DC
Converter +12 V ETX-CPU
-12 V
PC Backpanel
Modem Backpanel
PC1 Serial
PC2 Interface Board
SIB modem bus
LED SIB
SW1
Dial modem
NAV-LCU
LGM28.8
Connector Backpanel with Protectors
1a2 2a2 1sA 1sB LGM1 LGM2 LGM3 LGM4 ZUA NFK-1 NFK-2 2sA/ 2a1/ 1+2a3/ 1a1/ 1a3 2a3 IN/OUT
422 CTU 422 RSU
PTT
PC2 (analog
PC1 diagnosis or S0)
(D)VOR
4000
PTT Network
Printer
Fig. 6‐3 NAV–LCU 443, block diagram, example
Ed. 08.17 6–3

RCSE 443 RMMC
NAV-LCU 443 Description and Operation
6.2 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SETUP
6.2.1 General
The installation and initial setup for a remote control system with a (D)VOR 4000 station connected
to a NAV–LCU 443 is described in chapter 2. In contrast to the RCSE equipment, the NAV–LCU 443
does not comprise an INC panel.
No special installation instructions concerning NAV–LCU 443 have to be added (for installation see
section 2.2).
The initial setup procedure described in section 2.4 is also valid for the NAV–LCU 443.
6.3 MAINTENANCE, FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR
6.3.1 General
Measures concerning maintenance, fault detection and repair, which are described in chapter 5 for
the RCSE 443 equipment, are also valid for the NAV–LCU 443. The special configuration of the
NAV–LCU described within this chapter has to be considered. In contrast to the RCSE equipment,
the NAV–LCU 443 does not comprise an INC–panel.
No special installation instructions concerning NAV–LCU 443 have to be added (for installation see
section 2.2).
6–4 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
Description and Operation Control Tower Unit (CTU)
CHAPTER 7
CONTROL TOWER UNIT (CTU)
7.1 GENERAL
The CTU is intended for installation in the ATC control tower. The CTU panel provides system 'main
status' indications and may provide a separate status display for each Navaids subsystem as well as
switching the ILS or MLS to the active runway (on the optional panel RWY–SELECT).
The components of an RMMC system with one or more CTU(s) are (see Fig. 7‐1):
- the RCSE 443 consisting of the REU in various configurations with the INC panel,
- a Maintenance Data Terminal (PC/laptop and printer), and
- one or more cascaded Control Tower Units (CTU) with an optional runway selector
(RWY–SELECT)
The INC panel of the RCSE 443 indicates the detailed states of up to eight substations with the follow
ing LED displays: ALARM, WARNING, NORMAL, DATA COMmunication and MAINTENance. An addi
tional status indication device is the Control Tower Unit (CTU), which however, only indicates the
NORMAL, WARNING and ALARM operating states of up to eight NAV stations.
The CTU can be used in conjunction with a runway selector (RWY–SELECT), which activates the ILS
systems in one approach direction and switches the other direction to a dummy load. This panel also
indicates the general status of the two ILS systems (OPERATIONAL, DEGRADED, SHUT DOWN) and
their availability (ENABLE lamp) to the aircraft as a landing aid.
Maintenance Data Terminal with printer RCSE with REU and INC
CTU and RWY-SELECT
CTU and RWY-SELECT
Fig. 7‐1 RMMC configuration with cascaded CTU's (example)
Ed. 08.17 7–1

RCSE 443 RMMC
Control Tower Unit (CTU) Description and Operation
7.2 MECHANICAL DESIGN
The CTU panel indicates the NORMAL, WARNING and ALARM operating states of up to eight NAV
stations. Its display brightness is adjustable to permit adaptation to the varying light conditions in the
tower.
The RWY–SELECT panel indicates the general status of the two ILS systems (OPERATIONAL,
DEGRADED, SHUT DOWN) and the availability of the runway(s) via ENABLE lamp (runway can only
be switched on by RWY SELECT key switch if the corresponding lamp is on).
Control Tower Unit (CTU) RunWaY Select (optional)
AIR NAV SUBSYSTEM RWY-SELECT
19”-cabinet
520 x 179 x 300 [mm]
RWY-SELECT
(optional)
112.0 x 128.6 [mm]
CTU Blank panel
AC/DC,DC/DC converter in 19” subrack 314.4 x 128.6 [mm] (alt. to RWY-SELECT)
subrack: 482.6 x 133.3 x 150 [mm]
NOTE:The 19”-cabinet with power supply is used if the CTU ( with RWY–SELECT) is not mounted in an existing
19”–subrack of a control console.
Fig. 7‐2 CTU with RWY–SELECT
7–2 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
AC mains fuse
VAC 85V...264V
DC/DC
I
0
J1 CTU/RPU IN
J3 J4
VDC J17
J2 CTU/RPU SLAVE
-+
Fig. 7‐3 CTU and RWY–SELECT housing, back panel
Ed. 08.17 7–3

RCSE 443 RMMC
7–4 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.3 TECHNICAL DATA

7.3.1 Housing
For standard applications, the CTU and RWY–SELECT panels are mounted as a front panel to a 19
inch subrack which is mounted in a 19 inch housing (Fig. 7‐2). For special applications, it can also
be mounted in 19 inch racks or control consoles. The optional RWY–SELECT panel is an ILS applica
tion and only installed when required; if not equipped, it is replaced by a blank panel (see Fig. 7‐2).
7.3.2 Mounting site

The CTU is designed for the installation in a ATC air control tower. It should always be mounted in
the same building like the assigned RCSE443 equipment in order to avoid problems with the electrical
referencing which could arise in case of thunder storms mainly. However, should a CTU be installed
in another building, an additional inter–switched modem is recommended.
7.3.3 Power Supply

Input: DC +5 V (from REU) or
14 ... 70 V with built–in DC/DC converter
AC 85 ... 264 V with built–in AC/DC converter
7.3.4 Components
- Processor unit 8051 (PU–51) with generic software (firmware) to control the displays (indications)
and key activations (controls).
- CTU panel with status LEDs (status of up to 8 NAV stations) and control keys (brightness control,
alarm silent, lamp test).
- RWY–SELECT panel with status LEDs (of two ILS systems, runways) and a key switch for runway
selection (two key switch options: 2–Position and 3–Position, see section 7.3.6.2).
7.3.5 CTU Indication and Control

7.3.5.1 Subsystem (Station) Status Indication on CTU Panel
NORMAL green Normal Operation
All transmitter and monitor equipments are switched on, initialized and
serviceable for the intended category of operations (i. e. No Warning and
No Alarm Condition).
WARNING yellow Warning (Alert)
– Transmitter(s) OFF
– Equipm. initializing or (MLS: AZ/BAZ) reconfiguring
– Primary Equipment shut–down by monitor
– Limited Monitor Configuration (only one executive)
– Local Access (local panel or attached terminal)
– Monitor Bypass (one or both)
– MLS: Non–essential data shut–down
– MLS: C–band sync switched off
– Battery operation
ALARM red Alarm
– Subsystem shut–down
– Out–of–tolerance signal(s) while monitor in bypass
Ed. 08.17 7–5

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.3.5.2 Control Keys on the CTU Panel
On the CTU panel the following control keys are available:

BRIGHTNESS UP Increase brightness of indicators
BRIGHTNESS DOWN Decrease brightness of indicators
ALARM SILENT Visual and audible alarm reset
LAMP TEST Test of all LEDs on the CTU panel (all switched on).
7.3.6 RWY SELECT Indication and Control

7.3.6.1 ILS System Status Indication on the RWY–SELECT Panel
OPERATIONAL green Normal Operation

All subsystems of the ILS system required for operation in the
designated category of service are switched on, initialized and
fully serviceable. It is also required that all subsystems are under
remote control (no Warning, no Alarm).
DEGRADED yellow Degraded, Warning (Alert)
Any condition of a subsystem, that would impair the ILS system
availability or continuity of service (de–categorization).
Initialization or (AZ/BAZ) reconfiguration.
SHUT DOWN red Alarm
– Any subsystem OFF.
– Any shut–down of a subsystem.
– Local control of a subsystem.
ENABLE green Runway is available (controlled by the RCSE software) to be
switched on/off by RWY–SELECT key switch (for more information
see section 7.4.9).
7.3.6.2 RWY–SELECT Key Switch

A runway (i.e. the corresponding ILS system) can be switched on resp. off by the RWY–SELECT key
switch. The key switch function is only effective if the corresponding ENABLE lamp is on. If the
ENABLE lamp is off, the RWY switch is not effective to all stations (e.g. DME, Marker) of the correspon
dent runway.
Two options of RWY–SELECT panels with different key switch types are available (see also section
7.4.9):
S Panel with 2–Position key switch with

left position RWY1 Runway 1 on, Runway 2 off
right position RWY2 Runway 1 off, Runway 2 on
S Panel with 3–Position key switch with
left position RWY1 Runway 1 on, Runway 2 off
right position RWY2 Runway 2 on, Runway 1 off
mid position OFF Both runways off
The key of the key switch can be removed in all two resp. three positions.
7–6 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.4 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SETUP

7.4.1 Cabling
- Set the AC and DC power switch on the rear of the subracks to off ('OFF', '0'); this is the lower
position.
- Connect a ground or frame cable.
- Connect the power supply (either AC or DC, depending on the configuration).
- Connect the external equipment (see Fig. 2‐7).
ATTENTION
If using DC power, make sure to connect the DC power with the correct polarity
(+ and –).
VAC 85V...264V
DC power switch
DC/DC
I
0
CTU-subrack:
14 ... 70 V
+-
DC-Power J3 J4
Supply VDC J17
-+
Equipped with DC/DC-converter
VAC 85V...264V
Mains switch AC
DC/DC
I
Mains fuse
AC, F2H/250V 0
~
AC-Power J3 J4
Supply VDC J17
CTU-
subrack: -+
85 ... 264 V
Equipped with AC/DC-converter
Fig. 7‐4 CTU system cabling, power supply
Ed. 08.17 7–7

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.4.2 Pin Assignment of Interface Connectors
VAC 85V...264V
DC/DC
I
0
J1 CTU/RPU IN
J3 J4
VDC J17
J2 CTU/RPU SLAVE
-+
Fig. 7‐5 CTU subrack, back panel connectors

J1 SubD 9 pin connector used for CTU IN (female)

1 –RxD 6 -TxD
2 +RxD 7 +TxD
3 -CTS 8 -RTS
4 +CTS 9 +RTS
5 Gnd
J2 SubD 9 pin connector used for CTU SLAVE (male)

1 -TxD 6 -RxD
2 +TxD 7 +RxD
3 -RTS* 8 -CTS*
4 +RTS* 9 +CTS*
5 Gnd
* RTS/CTS not used, but provided for connection of external runway switch (RWY1 to pins 3/4, RWY2 to pins 8/9).
7.4.3 Initial Hardware Settings

7.4.3.1 General Prerequisites
This section describes the prerequisites for the first setup of the equipment and gives an overview
of the hardware settings. It presumes that the equipment has been factory–aligned and tested.
7.4.3.2 Assignment of Connected Stations (CTU and RWY–SELECT)

The top row of the CTU front panel contains vacant fields, which can be used for adhesive labels for
the connected stations to assign the status indications. The fields on the RWY–SELECT panel have
to be inscribed in the same way.
7–8 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.4.3.3 Hardware Settings
All relevant parameters are normally set before factory acceptance has taken place. These parame
ters are checked during the acceptance procedure. The figures show a default configuration of the
hardware settings, which may vary individually for each installation.
The EPROM of the processor unit for the CTU contains the complete software for test and operation.
The settings of the address coding switch have to be set in accordance with the tables Fig. 7‐6
(0 = OPEN, 1 = CLOSED). The settings are also indicated.
The Runway Select enable switches SW1 and SW2 define which runway is displayed (RWY1 and/or
RWY2) on the RWY–SELECT panel connected to the CTU.
Runway Select enable (Runway 1) Address coding switch

1=enabled 0=disabled example: V.1.23, CTU1 (St. 0...7) S5
OPEN
S5
SW1
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 9
type A
0 OPEN
1 S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 9
0
SW2 type A
W5 W4 W2 W3
RST
W1
RS 422 open set

in/out set
open
Reset Watchdog on/off Runway Select enable (Runway 2) Termination RS422 1 2 3
1=enabled 0=disabled
Switch position and setting of switch types

Software (up to V. 1.07) Address coding switch OPEN OPEN
0 0
987654321
CTU 001100100 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
closed closed
Software (V.1.23) Address coding switch
987654321
CTU 1 (station 0...7) 100100100
0 1 0 1
CTU 1 (station 8...15) 010100100 or
Test CTU 010100010 type A type B
Fig. 7‐6 CTU rear side, position of jumpers and default settings
Ed. 08.17 7–9

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.4.3.3.1 Settings using the Switch S5
The enhanced features of this section are available from software version 1.32 and higher. The loca
tion of the switch S5 is described in Fig. 7‐6.
S5.1 & S5.2: Buzzer time

S5.1=0, S5.2=0 15 seconds (as default like with the 'old' CTU).
S5.1=1, S5.2=0 No buzzer sound when a status change occurs.
S5.1=0, S5.2=1 180 seconds
S5.1=1, S5.2=1 Infinite; until the button ALARM SILENT is pressed.
S5.3: Status transmission of the button SIL at the RCSE

S5.3=0 No status transmission (as default like with the 'old' CTU).
S5.3=1 When the button ALARM SILENT is pressed, in the '2 RWY–Telegram'
the value '1' will be transmitted in Bit–3 of the order–runway–telegram
to the RCSE.
S5.4: Transmission of the buzzer status (ON or OFF) to the RCSE

S5.4=0 No buzzer status transmission (as default like with the 'old' CTU).
S5.4=1 When the buzzer is activated, in the 'RWY–Telegram' a value '1' will be
transmitted in Bit–5 of the order–runway–telegram to the RCSE.
Only for Thales technicians:
S5.5: Flag if the RCSE shall send a result telegram after the 'RWY–Telegram'
S5.5=0 No result request (as default like with the 'old' CTU)
S5.5=1 The RCSE requests a RWY result telegram from the RCSE (Bit–2 will
be set in the order–runway–telegram). When Bit–7 is set in the result
telegram, then the buzzer will be switched off (equal to the button
ALARM SILENT at the CTU).
S5.6: Flag if CTU works with a 'SendAllState'– or with a 'GetAllState' telegram

S5.6=0 With 'SendAllState' (as default like with the 'old' CTU).
S5.6=1 With 'GetAllState'. The CTU requests a 'GetAllState' telegram from the
RCSE ('SendAllState' telegrams wil be ignored).
S5.7: Reserved for future extensions

S5.7=0 Mandatory
S5.7=1 Not allowed
S5.8: Buzzer activation

S5.8=0 CTU mode (as default like with the 'old' CTU).
S5.8=1 The buzzer is activated in the same way as with the RCSE (recognition of
status changes).
7–10 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.4.4 Initial Setup
Switch on the AC switch or DC switch (depending on type of converter) on the rear of the CTU–sub
rack (see Fig. 7‐7).
On/Off switch if AC/DC converter

used (no function for DC).
CTU-subrack, rear side

On/Off switch if DC/DC converter
used (no function for AC)
Fig. 7‐7 Location of the On/Off switches at the CTU subrack (rear side)
Since the configuration files (e.g. *.sit) are not yet loaded, the main status of station no. 8 shows the
string 'No' 'stat' (i.e. 'no station') within the area EQUIPMENT–MAIN STATUS on the INC panel). The
status indications of the other connected stations are all switched off. After configuration of the REU
(described in section 2.4.2), the names and the subsystem states of the connected stations are indi
cated on the INC/CTU and the system status is indicated on the CTU.
The NORMAL indicators light up for the various subsystems during normal operation. If no mainte
nance data terminal is connected, the RCSE can commence operation.
7.4.5 Operation
7.4.5.1 Switching On
- AC power supply: The mains switch for the AC supply is located on the rear.
Set the switch to 'I' (upper position).
- DC power supply: The switch for the DC supply is located on the rear.
Set the switch to 'ON' (upper position).
When the CTU is switched on and the connected RCSE is in operation and ready to send status infor
mation, the subsystem states of the NAV stations are indicated on the CTU panel.
7.4.5.2 Switching Off
- AC power supply: The mains switch for the AC supply is located on the rear.
Set the switch to '0' (lower position).
- DC power supply: The switch for the DC supply is located on the rear.
Set the switch to 'OFF' (lower position).
Ed. 08.17 7–11

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.4.6 Controls of the CTU

7.4.6.1 Lamp Test
As long as the button LAMP TEST is pressed, the lamp test is activated: All indicators are on and the
text field indicates 'TEST'. The buzzer is also activated. If a station has been selected before the lamp
test was started, it remains selected and the request of the selected state telegrams runs in the back
ground.
7.4.6.2 Alarm Silent
The device buzzer sounds whenever the status of a station indicated on the device changes. This is
only provided in the DATA COM, NORMAL, WARNING and ALARM states. The buzzer remains
switched on as long as the ALARM SILENT button is pressed.
A station status change does not result in a buzzer alarm in the following situations:
- If either PC control or switch control has been set for the station.
- If the runway select bit for the runway to which the station belongs has been altered during the
previous 60 seconds.
- If the ADRACS maintenance function on maintenance data terminal is active.
7.4.6.3 Brightness Up/Down
The brightness of the indicators can be adapted to the ambient brightness with the BRIGHTNESS
UP and BRIGHTNESS DOWN controls.
If a station has been selected before the brightness control was started, it remains selected and the
request of selected state telegrams runs in the background.
AIR NAV SUBSYSTEM
ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM ALARM
ALARM BRIGHT- BRIGHT- LAMP

SILENT NESS NESS TEST
DOWN UP
Control Tower Unit (CTU)
Fig. 7‐8 CTU panel
7–12 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.4.6.4 Enable Runway Selection
The CTU has no control for the runway on its front panel (see Fig. 7‐8). The runway which is displayed
on the RWY-SELECT panel can be selected with the Runway Select enable switches SW1 and SW2
on the CTU board (CTU rear side). The following options are available:
SW1 (position '1'): Runway1 Select enabled (RWY1 displayed on RWY–SELECT panel)
SW1 (position '0'): Runway1 Select disabled (RWY1 not displayed on RWY–SELECT)
SW2 (position '1'): Runway2 Select enabled (RWY2 displayed on RWY–SELECT panel)
SW2 (position '0'): Runway2 Select disabled (RWY2 not displayed on RWY–SELECT)
Runway Select enable (Runway 1)

1
SW1
0 S1 OPEN
1
1 23 4 56 72 9
0
SW2
Runway Select enable (Runway 2)
RST
W1
Fig. 7‐9 CTU rear side, position of RWY–SELECT enable switches SW1 and SW2
7.4.7 CTU Cascading
It is always possible to connect several CTU's in a cascade with a CTU. The same status is indicated
on each unit. If one of the CTU's in the chain develops a fault however, all the indication units con
nected downstream of it will also be affected.
If there are two CTU's cascaded, one RWY–SELECT panel can be changed over to a single CTU, or
each RWY–SELECT can be used to switch only one runway:
CTU (1) SW1 = '1' => Runway 1 enabled (Runway 1 enabled on RWY–SELECT 1)
CTU (1) SW2 = '0' => Runway 2 disabled
Ed. 08.17 7–13

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.4.8 CTU Subsystem Status Indication
NORMAL => Normal Operation:

All transmitter and monitor equipments are switched on,
initialized and serviceable for the intended category
of operation (i. e. no Warning and no Alarm condition).
WARNING => Warning (Alert):
Transmitter(s) OFF, equipment initializing, primary equipment
shut–down by monitor, limited monitor configuration (only one
executive), local access (local panel or attached terminal), monitor
bypass (one or both), battery operation
ALARM => Alarm
Subsystem shut–down
Out–of–tolerance signal(s) while the monitor is in bypass
7.4.9 Controls of RWY–SELECT
7.4.9.1 Runway Selection
The hardware switches SW1/SW2 on the rear side of the CTU board enable or disable the selection
of runway 1 or runway 2 (see section 7.4.6.4).
The runways can be switched on (and off) with the key switch of the RWY–SELECT unit (see Figs.
7‐10 and 7‐11), but only if corresponding ENABLE lamp is on.
The operation of the 2–position key switch is:

– left position RWY1 Runway 1 on, runway 2 off
– right position RWY2 Runway 2 on, runway 1 off
RWY-SELECT
OPERATIONAL OPERATIONAL
DEGRADED DEGRADED
SHUT DOWN SHUT DOWN
ENABLE ENABLE
2-Position Key Switch
Fig. 7‐10 RWY–SELECT panel with 2–position key switch
7–14 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
The operation of the 3–position key switch is:

- left position RWY1 Runway 1 on, runway 2 off
- right position RWY2 Runway 1 off, runway 2 on
- mid position OFF Both runways off
RWY-SELECT
OPERATIONAL OPERATIONAL
DEGRADED DEGRADED
OFF
SHUT DOWN RWY 1 RWY 2 SHUT DOWN
ENABLE ENABLE
3-Position Key Switch
Fig. 7‐11 RWY–SELECT panel with 3–position key switch
The runways can be switched ON or OFF with the key switch on the front plate of the RWY–SELECT
unit. The ENABLE lamp of the selected runway must light. The RWY–SELECT switch function is only
effective if the ENABLED lamp of the correspondent runway lights. The status of the lamp is controlled
by the RCSE software.
The lamp status 'ENABLED off' is a result of the following conditions:

- Datacom error to LLZ or GP and DME (if it belongs to the system)
- Local control of LLZ or GP and DME (FACE LINK), no tower control
- Switch control mode (station selected at RCSE, control via INC possible, no tower control)
- PC control mode, maintenance mode active for a station in ADRACS, no tower control
- DME TX1 and TX2 SHUT DOWN
If the ENABLED lamp is off, the RWY–SELECT key switch is not effective to all stations (e.g. DME,
Marker) of the correspondent runway.
7.4.10 RWY–SELECT System Status Indication

OPERATIONAL => Operational performance fulfilled (e.g. Runway in CAT III mode)
DEGRADED => Operational performance limited (e.g. RWY degraded to CAT I/II)
SHUT DOWN => Runway shut down or has ALARM
ENABLE => Runway is available to be switched on by RWY–SELECT key switch
Ed. 08.17 7–15

RCSE 443 RMMC
7–16 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.5 CTU/RWY SUBASSEMBLIES
7.5.1 OVERVIEW
SUBASSEMBLY ASSIGNMENT CODE NUMBER*) REFERENCE
Power supply:
AC/DC converter (MELCHER LM 1001–7R) 84045 90700 7.5.3

DC/DC converter (MELCHER BM 1001–7R) 84045 89800 7.5.4
Processor board:
Processor unit 8051 (PU–51) 84045 82100 7.5.2
*) The code numbers given may differ to those of the delivered installation in individual cases. In such case the actual code
Fig. 7‐12 Circuit diagrams of CTU/RWY subassemblies
7.5.2 CTU/RWY–SELECT
The CTU is the tower status display and obtains its data via a RS422 interface from the REU via con
nector 2a1/CTU. It consists of the submodules processor unit PU–51, LED/display driver, status LED
and select keys. The generic software (firmware) of the PU–51 of the CTU controls the display and
key activations. The CTU can display the main status of 8 subsystems. The CTU can be mounted for
standard application in a 19 inch cabinet with separate power supply (+5 VDC). Two or more CTU
panels can be cascaded.
A RWY–SELECT panel with indicator can be mounted next to the CTU in the 19 inch subrack instead
of the blank panel. The RWY–SELECT panel is controlled by the CTU panel.
Status LED
Select keys
LED display driver
Audible Device
Processor unit PU-51 RWY-SELECT
RWY1/2 select
SERIAL DATA to/from REU
Fig. 7‐13 CTU/RWY–SELECT, block diagram
Ed. 08.17 7–17

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.5.3 AC/DC–Converter MELCHER LM 1001–7R Option A
The AC/DC converter comprises an input voltage range from 85 to 264 VAC. It is used within a CTU
19 inch cabinet. The converter inputs are protected against surges and transients occuring at the
source lines. An input over– and undervoltage lock–out circuitry disables the outputs if the input volt
age is outside the specified range.
All outputs are open– and short–circuit proof and are protected against overvoltages by means of
built–in suppressor diodes. The outputs can be inhibited by a logical signal applied to the connector
pin 2 (i). LED indicators display the status of the converter and allow visual monitoring of the system
at any time. Full input to output, input to case, output to case and output to output isolation is pro
vided.
The modules are designed and built according to the international safety standard IEC/EN 60950 and
have been approved by the safety agencies LGY (Germany) and UL (USA).
A temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal which disables the outputs if the case temperature
exceeds the limit. The outputs are automatically re–enabled when the temperature drops below the
limit.
Using option A of the AC/DC converter module includes test sockets provided at the front panel of
the module for check of the output voltage. The output voltage is sensed at the connector pins inside
the module.
i
2
Main control circuit
20
Output 1
U01
Filter
Vi+ 23
Forward converter
29
approx. 70 kHz
Input Filter
14
Control Output 2
U02
circuit Filter
17
Fuse
Vi-
8
32 Control Output 3
circuit Filter U03
11
26
Fig. 7‐14 AC/DC converter (MELCHER LM 1001–7R), block diagram
7–18 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.5.4 DC/DC–Converter MELCHER BM 1001–7R Option D
The DC/DC converter comprises an input voltage range from 14 to 70 VDC. It is used within a CTU
19 inch cabinet. The converter inputs are protected against surges and transients occuring at the
source lines. An input over– and undervoltage lock–out circuitry disables the outputs if the input volt
age is outside the specified range.
All outputs are open circuit proof and short–circuit proof. All outputs are protected against overvol
tages by means of built–in suppressor diodes. The outputs can be inhibited by a logical signal applied
to the connector pin 2 (i). LED indicators display the status of the converter and allow visual monitor
ing of the system at any time. Full input to output, input to case, output to case and output to output
isolation is provided.
The modules are designed and built according to the international safety standard IEC/EN 60950 and
have been approved by the safety agencies LGY (Germany) and UL (USA).
A temperature sensor generates an inhibit signal which disables the outputs if the case temperature
exceeds the limit. The outputs are automatically re–enabled when the temperature drops below the
limit. Using option D (which includes also option V) of the DC/DC converter module includes an input
and/or output undervoltage monitoring circuitry. A safe data signal output (D0 to D9) is generated at
pin 5 (D/V) as soon as one of the monitored voltages drops below a preselected threshold level (op
tion D). Additionally an ACFAIL signal (V signal) is generated (option V) which conforms to the VME
standard.
i
2
D/V
Main control circuit 5
20
Output 1 U01
Filter
Vi+ 23
Forward converter
29
approx. 70 kHz
Input Filter
14
Control Output 2 U02
circuit Filter
17
Fuse
Vi-
8
32 Control Output 3
U03
circuit Filter
11
26
Fig. 7‐15 DC/DC converter (MELCHER BM 1001–7R), block diagram
Ed. 08.17 7–19

RCSE 443 RMMC
7–20 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.6 MAINTENANCE, FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR

7.6.1 General Introduction to Maintenance
Within this chapter, two basic types of preventive maintenance are described, namely periodic main
tenance and normal maintenance. Since the CTU does not comprise any part which is subject to me
chanical wear and tear, the periodic maintenance intervals can be made longer than usual. In addition
to the periodic maintenance work, there are a few activities of normal maintenance which should be
performed as and when necessary. Should a repair be necessary in case of a fault, this could also
be defined as 'corrective maintenance' activity.
NOTE: The responsible authorities (e.g. ATC/Controls) must be informed before commencing
any maintenance work in accordance with national regulations!
7.6.1.1 Elimination of Electrostatic Charges

The CTU device contains subassemblies (plug–in cards) equipped with components which are
sensitive to electrostatic discharge. When replacing subassemblies and plug–in cards containing
electrostatically sensitive components, special precautionary measures should be taken during
removal, transport and installation in order to prevent damage to the components. We refer to the
manufacturer's customer documentation.

If any of the maintenance personnel needs to touch subassemblies which contain electrostatically
sensitive components, they should place both hands flat on a grounded conductive surface for a few
seconds to eliminate static charges. The subassembly can be touched – preferably at an insulator
(board edge, lever mechanism, etc.) – as soon as the potential has been equalized in this manner.
It is advisable to avoid touching the contacts of the plug–in connectors, the conductor paths and the
components themselves. Some of the subassemblies must be left in their antistatic packaging or
plastic bags as long as possible.
Removing a subassembly in case of repair or maintenance activity

1. Switch off the system before beginning the replacement procedure
hands and/or use an earthing cable on the arm
3. Remove the subassembly and lay it down on a bench with a grounded conductive worktop
hands and/or use an earthing cable on the arm
2. Remove the subassembly from the antistatic plastic bag
3. Install the subassembly
4. Switch the system on again.
Ed. 08.17 7–21

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.6.2 Periodic Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is scheduled in daily, weekly, monthly or yearly measures which are neces
sary or recommended. The following table contains these recommendations.
No. After initial setup

1 Basic settings:
For first alignment procedures for Navaids 400 and SYSTEM 4000 stations (LLZ, GP, FFM,
CVOR, DVOR) the ADRACS user program has to be used, see Technical Manual ADRACS,
code no. 83140 55324. For DME/TACAN refer to the appropriate technical manuals.
No. Daily maintenance

– No recommended activities
No. Weekly maintenance

- No recommended activities
No. Monthly maintenance, additional to weekly

2 Lamp test in order to check the CTU's general operability (see section 7.4.6.1)
No. Yearly maintenance, additional to quarterly

3 Damage check and visual inspection (see section 7.6.2.1) and/or
4 Cleaning of the equipment housing and the CTU panel (see section 7.6.2.2)
7.6.2.1 Damage Check and Visual Inspection
The following system parts have to be checked visually:
- Check for outside damages of the equipment housing, CTU panel and cabling
- Check tight fitting of all cable connections and earthing connections (external)
- Check tight fitting of all mechanical parts (screws and nuts)
- Check all openings of the equipment housing for dust, dirt or other obstacle of air flow and - if
present - remove it
- Check the CTU panel for dust, dirt and - if present - remove it.
7.6.2.2 Cleaning of the Equipment Housing and the CTU Panel
the instructions about the elimination of electrostatic charges in section 7.6.1.1
Use clean water or soap suds to clean the CTU panel. Only two types of alcohol, namely Ethyl alcohol
or Glycol, should be used to remove heavier layers of dirt on the front panel. Cleaning procedure:
Moisten a cloth a little with one of the liquids mentioned above and remove dirt.
7–22 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.6.2.3 Dusting the Subassemblies
the instructions about the Elimination of Electrostatic Charges in section 7.6.1.1.
Dusting of the subassemblies should only be done in conjunction with removal of a subassembly
when this becomes necessary in any case of some other purpose. Even then, subassemblies should
only be dusted if dust was detected by the visual check. They should only be dusted using a soft brush
and, if possible, with the aid of a vacuum cleaner. During such operations, it is essential to observe
all precautionary measures described in section 1.4.6.2 for voltage–sensitive semiconductors.
7.6.3 FAULT LOCATION

7.6.3.1 Frequently Asked Trouble–Shooting Questions
This section shows the quickest way for troubleshooting in a short form description. Fault symptoms
are explained in the sequence of their general probability. More detailed descriptions for fixing the
faults are explained in the following sections.
Fault symptom: CTU equipment does not start at all
- Verify the external power supply fed to the equipment incl. the correct fitting of the power supply
cable's plugs and the fuses. See section 7.6.3.3 'Fault Location Table Power Supply'
- Verify the correct fitting of all external data connection cables
- Verify the correct fitting of all internal cable connections.
Fault symptom: Communication functions are not available

- Verify the correct address coding switch and other switches settings on the CTU rear side (see
section 7.4.3.3). Check if the connection line to the RCSE 443 works properly by conducting a
Lamp Test (7.4.6.1). If the fault symptoms seem to be belonging to the RCSE side, verify that the
setting of all RCSE's DIP–Fix–switches and jumpers are correct (see section 2.3).
- Pin Assignment of the interface connectors on the CTU rear side: Sockets CTU IN (female) and/or
CTU SLAVE (male) do not work properly due to wrong pin assignment. Verify the correct pin as
signment according to section 7.4.3.3. If the communication problem remains existent, the most
probable fault reason is the processor unit 8051 (PU–51). In this case, exchange PU–51.
Fault symptom: Equipment does not react after the lamp test command
- Check fuses and power supply of CTU panel –> Re–establish the power supply or replace fuse
- CTU panel is faulty -> Exchange the CTU panel
- CTU panel is not faulty -> Exchange the processor unit 8051 (PU–51).
Fault symptom: Problem due to CTU Cascading
- If several CTU units are cascaded (see section 7.4.7) and one CTU unit of this chain is faulty, the
displays of all following units are affected. In case the current CTU runs properly, the fault reason
has to be established amongst the other CTU units of the system.
Ed. 08.17 7–23

RCSE 443 RMMC
7.6.3.2 Overview Fault Location Tables
There are 5 columns in the fault location tables: Step, Fault, A to C. To execute fault location, start
with the left column and proceed to the right; following A, B, C; and - if more steps are sequenced
- again in next row from A to C. Abbreviations: Y= Yes; N= No. The column 'Fault' names the compo
nent/subassembly, which is discussed in the current row.
Pos. Subassembly Reference

1 Power supply 7.6.3.3
2 CTU panel 7.6.3.4
3 Processor Unit 8051 (PU–51) 7.6.3.5
7.6.3.3 Fault Location Power Supply

General: Before replacing the AC/DC converter (or DC/DC converter) or before investigating other
fault causes, check the availability of external power supply fed to the equipment.
Step Fault A B C
1 AC/DC converter Correct AC voltage used? AC power mains switch ON?
(REU: 115 V or 230 V) (this switch is situated on the
REU rear side)
2 AC/DC converter Status-LED1) of the AC/DC AC input power available? N: Exchange AC/DC
converter (internal) is OFF? If yes, exchange AC fuses. converter.
3 AC/DC converter AC power mains switch ON? Status-LED1) of the AC/DC Y: Exchange AC/DC
(this switch is situated on the converter (internal) is OFF? converter.
REU rear side)
4 AC/DC converter Excessive temperature? Power outputs are automati
Temperature sensor cally re-enabled when the
inhibits power output. temperature drops below the
limits.
5 DC/DC converter DC power mains switch ON? Correct DC voltage used? DC input power
(this switch is situated on the available?
REU rear side)
6 DC/DC converter Status-LED1) of the DC/DC DC input power available? N: Exchange DC/DC
converter (internal) is OFF? If yes, exchange AC fuses. converter.
7 DC/DC converter Excessive temperature? The power outputs are auto
(temperature sensor matically re-enabled when
inhibits power output) the temperature drops below
the limits.
1) See Fig. 3‐1 for the location of this LED (internal, behind INC panel, analog to RCSE).
7–24 Ed. 08.17

RMMC RCSE 443
7.6.3.4 Fault Location Table CTU Panel
The CTU panel is the status display of the CTU. Read a more detailed description in section 7.2.
Step Fault A B C
1 CTU panel Single LEDs or lamps on the Check jumpers Exchange CTU panel
CTU panel do not light up
with the lamp test or in normal
operation
2 CTU panel Incorrect indications on the Check cable connections on Exchange processor unit
CTU panel the RCSE backpanel and on 8051 (PU–51)
the processor unit 8051
(PU-51)
7.6.3.5 Fault Location Table Processor Unit 8051 (PU–51)
The processor unit 8051 (PU–51) with generic software (firmware) controls the displays (indications)
and key activations (controls).
Step Fault A B C
1 Processor unit Pushing buttons shows no Check data cable connections If data cable connections
8051 (PU–51) reaction on the REU backpanel and on are OK: Exchange pro
the processor unit 8051 cessor unit 8051 (PU–51)
(PU–51)
2 Processor unit CTU shows no reaction after a Verify that the CTU equipment Verify the power supply
8051 (PU–51) lamp test command is switched ON. and the good state of the
mains fuse
If CTU panel is not faulty,
exchange processor unit 8051
(PU–51)
7.6.4 Repairs
Repair measures concerning the CTU are widely analog to those in chapter 5 for the RCSE, they are
also valid for the CTU. The topics concerning the CTU are listed in the reference list below:
- General 5.5.1
- Safety Precautions for Repair Works 5.5.2
- General Safety Regulations 5.5.2.1
- Safe Work on the Equipment 5.5.2.2
- Cleaning of the Equipment Housing and the CTU front panel 7.6.2.2
- Dusting the Subassemblies 7.6.2.3
- Replacing AC Fuses 5.5.2.3
- Replacing DC Fuses 5.5.2.4
Ed. 08.17 7–25

RCSE 443 RMMC
7–26 Ed. 08.17

8314055322-En-104 G 08.17 Rcse 443

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

8314055322-En-104 G 08.17 Rcse 443

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Reference No.

Remote Control and

As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the

All rights reserved

STRUCTURE OF TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

Part Technical Manual P/N

Part Set of Circuit Diagrams P/N

VALIDITY OF TECHNICAL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTS

REFERENCED DOCUMENTS TO THIS MANUAL

Ed. 08.17 Info 1

Ed. 08.17 Info 2

This Technical Manual describes the equipment in the following chapters:

Safety notice system

Table of effective pages

Pages Ed. Remarks

1.4.3.2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1‐22

1.6.3.4 Communication via Open Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–38

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Ed. 08.17 III

2.4.1 Initial Power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

4.3.5 Modems LGM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4‐7

5.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5.5.4 Trouble–shooting in Case of Problems with Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . 5–20

CHAPTER 6 NAV–LCU 443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

CHAPTER 7 CONTROL TOWER UNIT (CTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

Ed. 08.17 VII

7.4.6.1 Lamp Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12

VIII Ed. 08.17

Ed. 08.17 AV‐1

AV‐2 Ed. 08.17

DVOR Doppler Very High Frequency Omnidirectional Radio Range

HDLC High-level Data Link Protocol

Ed. 08.17 AV‐3

AV‐4 Ed. 08.17

Ed. 08.17 AV‐5

RCMS Remote Control Monitoring System

AV‐6 Ed. 08.17

Ed. 08.17 AV‐7

AV‐8 Ed. 08.17

Ed. 08.17 1‐1

- USER–FRIENDLY OPERATOR INTERFACES

- LOW EQUIPMENT COSTS

Fig. 1‐1 Overview RMMC

1‐2 Ed. 08.17

1.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.2.2 Components of the System

1.2.2.2 Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS)

1.2.2.3 Remote Maintenance Center (RMC)

1.2.2.4 Navaids Local Communication Unit (NAV–LCU 443)

Ed. 08.17 1‐3

1.2.2.5 Remote Maintenance Subsystem (RMS)

1.2.3 Hierarchy of RMMC Remote Control Equipment

RMC-C Remote Maintenance Center

RMC-R RMC-R RMC-R

RMS RCMS 443 ILS

AZ EL DME/P TAC ELTA

Fig. 1‐2 Hierarchy of the remote control subsystems

1‐4 Ed. 08.17

1.2.4 System Configuration

Type Modem Baudrate Remark

Dedicated ZU1 600 baud SYSTEM 4000

LGM1200MD 600/1200 baud (V.23) SYSTEM 4000,

LGM9600H1 1200 baud (V.23), ILS/MK20A